JP2020018924A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a pinball game machine allowing a player to fully enjoy a performance produced when changing over shooting guide information.SOLUTION: When a game state is transferred from a first game state in which it is advantageous to a player to aim at a first flow-down passage, to a second game state in which it is advantageous to the player to aim at a second flow-down passage, a game machine displays second shooting guide information for aiming at the second flow-down passage, however, when the game state is transferred from the second game state to the first game state, displays first shooting guide information for aiming at the first flow-down passage. When the display is changed over from the second shooting guide information to the first shooting guide information (Figure 27 t6), or when the display is to be changed over (Figure 31 te), the game machine produces a performance (a treasure box performance) for diverting the player's attention from the changeover event from the second shooting guide information to the first shooting guide information, for a prescribed period (Figure 27 tb-tc and Figure 31 tx-ty) including at least a period when at least the first shooting guide information is displayed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 25

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been a ball-and-roll game machine called a probable falling type. In this fall type gaming machine, when a big hit is made, the gaming state after the end of the big hit shifts to a probable change state (high probability, with electric tu support), and during the probable change state, a jackpot lottery and a fall lottery are performed. If you win the fall lottery first, the gaming state shifts from the probable change state to the time saving state (low probability, with electric tue support) at that time, or from the probable change state to the normal state (low probability, no electric chew support) Move to

  In addition, in this type of ball game machine, during the jackpot game and during the probable change state after the end of the big hit game, the launch direction of the game ball is determined to be advantageous to the player under the probable change state in the probable state. ), And after that, when the probable change state ends, the guidance information display of “left-handed” is performed, and guidance to “left-handed” that is advantageous to the player is performed. (See Patent Document 1). This guidance information display control of the launch direction is to be switched at the same time as the launch direction that is advantageous to the player is switched.

  Therefore, in the case of a probability-changing falling-type gaming machine, when controlling to switch the guidance information display in the launch direction from "right-handed" to "left-handed", a "left-handed guidance notification image" is displayed on the screen of the image display means. The timing should be performed at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display operation that has won the falling lottery, that is, at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display operation that has fallen from the probable state to the normal state, and the actual machine observes this. Therefore, when the guidance information image on the screen is switched from the "right-handed" guidance information display to the "left-handed" guidance information display, the player visually recognizes the switching event of the guidance information image from the moment of the switching. You can do it. If the player recognizes the switching event from the guidance information display of “right-strike” to the guidance information display of “left-strike”, the launch is stopped in order to wake up to the game or prevent unnecessary balls from being generated. It is supposed to be.

JP 2012-196349 A

  However, in a falling-type gaming machine, in the symbol variation display operation that has fallen from the probable state or the time saving state to the low-probability state, as the effect of the symbol fluctuating display operation with the start of the design fluctuation display operation, for example, the probable state or An effect (hereinafter, referred to as “skeptical effect”) that suggests or suspects a fall from the time reduction state to the normal state appears. Assuming that a battle effect appears as this skeptical effect and whether or not the player has fallen to the normal state is notified based on the result of the battle, at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display operation, on the other hand, the driving direction guidance The notification (notification of the launch guidance information) switches from right-handed to left-handed, and on the other hand, a situation arises in which a battle effect appears as skeptical effect. That is, although the battle effect has just started, the driving direction guidance notification has already been switched from right-handed to left-handed.

  Here, if the player visually recognizes the switching event of the launch guidance information from right strike to left strike, it is presumed that the launch will be stopped. However, if the time point of recognizing the switching event of the launch guidance information, that is, the operation time point of canceling the launching is too early, there is a problem that there is no point in continuing the skeptical effect as the effect in the symbol variation display operation. .

  For example, if the launch is stopped at the same time as the occurrence of the switching event of the launch guidance information, the battle effect, which is the effect of the symbol change display operation, has just started at this time. Therefore, if the player has stopped launching from the point at which this battle effect has just started, from the viewpoint of the playability, a battle effect is produced as an effect corresponding to the symbol variation display operation. In spite of the fact that the duration of the battle effect continues for a long time, the player stops playing the game, and the player can fully enjoy the battle effect that is the effect of the symbol variation display operation. It will not be.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to solve the above-mentioned problem and to provide a ball-and-ball game machine capable of causing a player to fully enjoy the effect that occurs when the firing guidance information is switched.

  The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means. Although the corresponding elements in the embodiment are shown in parentheses, the present invention is not limited to this.

(1) It is configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of game states,
The game area (3) is configured to be able to be divided into a first downflow path (3b) and a second downflow path (3c) according to the strength of the game ball launched by the launching means, and the second downflow path (3c) is formed according to the gaming state. In a ball game machine configured such that a game progress is advantageous or disadvantageous to a player depending on which one of a downflow path of the first downflow path and the downflow path of the second downflow path,
Notice effect control means (S743 to S750) for causing the notice effect to appear on the image display means (liquid crystal display device 36) by notice lottery;
The image display means notifies the user of firing guidance information (right arrow image 374a, left arrow image 374b) regarding which of the first down flow path and the second down flow path is advantageous for the player according to the game state. Launch guidance information control means (S742) for performing
The firing guidance information control means may be configured to control the game state from a first game state in which it is advantageous for the player to aim at the first down flow path, to a second game state in which it is advantageous for the player to aim at the second down flow path. In the case of shifting to, the second launch guidance information that guides the player to aim at the second downstream path is displayed as the launch guidance information (S771, S772, S775), and the gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the second gaming state. When the game mode shifts to the first game state, a launch guidance information display control means (S762) for displaying (S773, S779) first launch guidance information that guides the user to aim at the first downstream path as the launch guidance information. ,
The announcement effect control means is configured to switch the display of the launch guidance information from the display of the second launch guidance information to the display of the first launch guidance information (t6 in FIG. 27) or to switch to the display (FIG. 31). Te), in at least a predetermined period (tb to tc in FIG. 27 and tx to ty in FIG. 31) including a period in which the first launch guidance information is displayed, the launch guidance information is the same as the second launch guidance information. An effect (treasure box effect in FIG. 27, treasure box effect in FIG. 31) for distracting the player's attention from the event of switching from the display to the display of the first launch guidance information,
A ball game machine characterized by the following.

(2) The launch guidance information display control means provides first launch guidance information (left arrow image 374b) that guides the user to aim at the first downstream path, and second launch that guides the target to aim at the second downstream path. It is displayed in a display mode (left arrow right movement) similar to the guidance information (right arrow right movement of the right arrow image 374a).
The ball game machine according to the above (1), wherein

(3) An effect for distracting the player from the event in which the launch guidance information is switched from the display of the second launch guidance information to the display of the first launch guidance information is a player participation type effect (push button continuous tapping). To produce)
The ball game machine according to the above (1) or (2), wherein

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible for a player to fully enjoy the effect produced at the time of switching of the launch guidance information.

It is a front perspective view showing the appearance of the ball game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the front side of the game board of the ball game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing the control device of the ball game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure provided for explanation of a hit type of a ball game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure provided for explanation of the screen display of the liquid crystal display concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure provided for explanation of the pre-reading notice effect concerning one embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main control-side main processing according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side timer interrupt processing which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management processing in FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a start-up opening check process used in the special figure 1 start-up check processing and the special figure 2 start-up check processing in FIG. 9. It is a flowchart which shows the ground state setting process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the fall determination processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric auditors product management process in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the production control side main processing concerning one embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command reception interruption process according to the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control side timer interrupt processing of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command receiving process at the time of a prize in the received command analysis process in FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern designation command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration design specification command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the launch guidance information control processing in FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a launch guidance information output start process in FIG. 21. FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a firing guidance information output end process in FIG. 21. It is the figure which showed the list | wrist of Embodiment 1-6 which performs left-handing guidance information of this invention. It is the figure which showed the relationship between the launch guidance information notification and the treasure chest effect in the first embodiment of the present invention at the time of right notification and left notification. 5 is a time chart illustrating a specific example 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart which showed the relationship of the period length of the launch guidance information notification and the treasure chest effect of specific example 1 in Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is the figure which showed the relationship between the launch guidance information notification and the treasure chest effect in the second embodiment of the present invention at the time of right-handed notification and at the time of left-handed notification. It is a time chart which showed example 2A in Embodiment 2 of the present invention. 9 is a time chart illustrating a specific example 2B according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart which showed the relationship of the period length between launch guidance information notification and treasure box production in Embodiment 2 of the present invention. It is the figure which showed the relationship between treasure chest production and hold storage in Embodiment 2 of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a state category association table that forms part of the transfer destination mode distribution table according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is the figure which showed the production mode transfer lottery table which forms a part of the transfer destination mode distribution table in Embodiment 2 of the present invention. It is a figure showing a specific example of production modes A to E in Embodiment 2 of the present invention. It is a time chart which showed example 3B in Embodiment 3 of the present invention. FIG. 19 is a diagram provided for describing a distraction effect according to Modification Example 4. 38 is a time chart for explaining FIG. 37; It is a figure provided for explanation of character announcement effect 1 concerning modification 5. It is a figure provided for explanation of character announcement effect 2 concerning modification 5. It is a figure provided for explanation of character announcement effect 3 concerning modification 5. It is a figure provided for explanation of character announcement effect 4 concerning modification 5. It is a figure provided for explanation of a character announcement effect concerning modification 5. It is a figure provided for explanation of the special display announcement effect pattern concerning modification 5. It is the figure which showed the specific example regarding the special display announcement effect object concerning the modification 5.

  Hereinafter, a preferred embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail. In the embodiment described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine according to the present invention.

<List of Embodiments: FIG. 24>
Embodiments of the present invention include those of Embodiments 1 to 6, depending on the type of ball game machine in which the guidance information display is switched from right-handed to left-handed. This is shown as a list in FIG. The first embodiment (section a in FIG. 24) relates to a gaming machine called “immediate fall type”, and the second embodiment (section b to c in FIG. 24) is referred to as “probable falling type 1” in this specification. The third embodiment (sections d to e in FIG. 24) relates to a gaming machine that is classified, and relates to a gaming machine that is classified as “probable falling type 2” in this specification. Further, Embodiment 4 (section f in FIG. 24) relates to a gaming machine classified as “ST machine type” in this specification, and Embodiment 5 (sections g to h in FIG. 24) corresponds to this specification. In the present specification, the gaming machine classified as “a type including a jackpot with an electric support (electric chew support)” and the sixth embodiment (section i in FIG. 24) are described as “a jackpot without an electric support (normal Gaming machines classified as "types including jackpots".

  The above-mentioned instantaneous fall type, probable fall type 1 and probable fall type 2 are the specified number of times in which the number of fluctuations that allow the probable change state is long (if the probable change state is continued, the jackpot will almost certainly occur during the probable change state. (For example, 10,000 times), and if this point is focused on, it can be classified as the ST machine type. The same applies to the case where “probably variable jackpot” is handled in the sections g to h “type including jackpot with electric support” in FIG. In the case of a probable change state, infinity can be set instead of 10,000 times.

  Hereinafter, Embodiments 1 to 6 will be described in order, centering on Embodiment 1, with reference to the drawings.

<First embodiment>
<1. Outline of Configuration: FIGS. 1 and 2>
With reference to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, an outline of a configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention will be described. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of a gaming board.

  First, with reference to FIG. 1, the configuration of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 has a frame-shaped front frame 2 attached to the front of a wooden outer frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, and a game board storage frame (not shown) attached to the back of the front frame 2. The board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted, and a game area 3 a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a.

  A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6. When a key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 is changed. By operating the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 is released, and the front frame 2 can be opened to the front side.

  A front operation panel 7 pivotally supported on the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) is provided below the glass door 6. An upper tray unit 8 is provided on the front operation panel 7, and an upper tray 9 for storing discharged game balls is formed on the upper tray unit 8.

  The upper tray unit 8 includes a ball release button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 below the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a game ball lending device (not shown) on the pachinko hall island facility side. A ball lending button 11 for requesting payout of game balls and a card return button 12 for requesting return of a valuable medium inserted into the game ball lending device are provided.

  The upper saucer unit 8 is configured to be operable by a player, and is used when a specific effect (for example, a player participation-type effect) is changed before and after the operation, and is provided with a first effect button (normal button). ), A second effect button (rotating light button), and a “frame effect button 13” that is active as a third effect button (rolling button). The frame effect button 13 becomes operable (input can be received) during a specific effect or during a specific period, for example, and is operated during the operable period (during an input accept period) to change the effect. It acts as a "production operation means" to bring it.

  On the right side of the front operation panel 7, a firing operation handle 15 for operating the firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided. On both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the firing operation handle 15, there are provided speakers 46 for producing a sound effect (sound effect) by sound. In addition, a plurality of decorative lamps 45 having a light effect by decoration of light are provided at various places of the glass door 6.

(Game board: Fig. 2)
Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 3 shown in FIG. 2 is mainly composed of a substantially square wooden plywood or resin board. As shown in the drawing, the game board 3 is provided with a ball guide rail 5 for guiding a shot game ball in a ring shape as a board surface defining member, and a substantially circular area surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is provided. It is a game area 3a, and the four corners are non-game areas.

  In a substantially central portion of the game area 3a, for example, in three (left, middle, right) display areas (symbol change display areas), a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numbers, characters, symbols, etc.) are independently provided. A liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) capable of performing a variable display and a stop display of a left symbol (corresponding to the left display area), a middle symbol (corresponding to the middle display area), and a right symbol (corresponding to the right display area) is provided. Have been. The liquid crystal display device 36 displays various effects as images under the control of the effect control unit 24 described later.

  In the game area 3a, a center decoration 48 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a far winding manner. The center decoration 48 protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls and allows the flow path of the game balls to be distributed to the left and right according to the strength or stroke length of the game balls ( It works as a channel distribution means. In the present embodiment, the center decoration 48 is arranged at a substantially central portion of the game area 3a such that the flow path of the game ball is formed on both upper sides (left and right sides) in the game area 3a by the presence of the center decoration 48. However, in the case of this embodiment, the center decoration 48 has a shape bulging slightly to the right.

  The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 and is fixed to the game board 3 with fixing screws or the like. An armor frame 48b surrounding the screen is integrally provided. Substantially the entire armor frame portion 48b protrudes forward from the front mounting plate 48a, and prevents game balls from entering the inside thereof, that is, the liquid crystal display device 36 side. A play area through which the game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball is guided to the right side. The game balls driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the firing device 32 are distributed right and left on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and the left flow path 3b on the left side of the center decoration 48 and the right flow path 3c on the right side are formed. Flow down either. Such a center decoration 48 functions as a game ball falling direction changing member (falling direction changing means) for changing the falling direction of the game ball.

  Although not shown, the center ornament 48 is provided with a game ball that has entered from a ball entrance (not shown) provided on the left side of the armor frame portion 48b at the front lower portion of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the left-right direction. A stage is provided which is freely rolled and falls from the center (a starting port guideway) at the center in the left-right direction or from both left and right sides thereof. In addition, the center ornament 48 is provided with a movable body part (a clock part 81, a flower part 90, etc., which will be described later) that exerts a visual effect according to the operation mode in an appropriate place.

  The non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a function display section, and a 7-segment display (with dots) is provided with the upper starting port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower starting. A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display means) which are arranged side by side in correspondence with the mouth 35 (for the second special symbol). Is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the special symbol variable display game is executed by the variable display operation of the “special symbol” represented by the 7-segment (variable display operation for setting the start and stop of the variation). It has become. The above-mentioned liquid crystal display device 36 displays a decorative symbol by image in synchronism with the display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in time, and displays a notice effect (for example, effect image display). At the same time, a decorative symbol variation display game is executed (the details of these symbol variation display games will be described later).

  In addition, in the various function display units, a composite display device (hold composite display LED display) 38c composed of a 7-segment display (with dots) is arranged next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. The combination is called the display of the number of pending balls in the special symbol 1, the number of pending balls in the special symbol 2, the variable time reduction function is activated (medium hours) and the high probability state (high accuracy). This is because this is a hold / time saving / high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter, simply referred to as “composite display device”) having five display functions of status notification.

  Further, the various function display unit is provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (ordinary symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In the ordinary symbol display device 39a, a variation display operation of an ordinary symbol represented by two LEDs (for example, alternately turning on and off in a seesaw manner, and stopping in a state where either side is illuminated, determines whether or not the right or wrong is determined. Is determined), a normal symbol change display game is executed. Further, a round number display device 39b in which three LEDs (first to third round display LEDs) are arranged adjacent to the ordinary symbol display device 39a is provided.

  Below the center decoration 48, an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means) are provided. The normal fluctuation winning device 41 is provided on the upper and lower sides, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper starting port sensor 34a, lower starting port sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of a game ball are formed inside each of them. ing.

  The upper starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is a first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 1") in the special symbol displaying device 38a (first special symbol displaying device). , Which is sometimes referred to as “special figure 1”), which is a winning port related to the starting condition of the variable display operation, and does not have a starting port opening / closing means (a means for opening or enlarging the starting port). It is configured as a winning device. In the present embodiment, the action of a game ball falling direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration 48, or the like) in the game area 3a causes the left starting path 3b to reach the upper starting port 34. The game balls flowing down the right flow path 3c are configured to be easy to win, while the game balls flowing down the right flow path 3c are difficult to win or cannot win.

  The normal variable winning device 41 is configured as a winning rate variable type winning device that can change the winning rate of the game ball of the starting port by the starting port opening / closing means, and specifically, is a second special symbol starting port. The lower starting port 35 is configured as a so-called “electric tulip-type” winning device including a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 that can be opened or enlarged. The lower starting port 35 of the normal fluctuation winning device 41 is a second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol is referred to as “special symbol 2”) in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). (Hereinafter abbreviated as “Tokuzu 2”) according to the starting condition of the variable display operation. The winning area of the lower starting port 35 depends on the operating state (operating or non-operating) of the movable wing piece 47. The state is converted into an open state (easy winning state) for facilitating winning, and a closed state (hard winning state) that makes winning more difficult or impossible than the open state. In the present embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is not operated, the closed state (winning impossible state) in which it is impossible to win the lower starting port 35 is maintained.

  On each side of the normal variable winning device 41, there are provided four general winning ports 43, three on the left side and one on the right side, and inside each of them, a general winning port for detecting the passage of a game ball. A sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed.

  In addition, a diagonally upper right side of the normal fluctuation winning device 41, that is, an upper side from an intermediate portion of the right flow down path 3c, is provided with a normal symbol starting port 37 including a pass gate (specific pass area) through which game balls can pass. . The normal symbol starting port 37 (third starting means) is a winning port related to the fluctuation display operation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 39a, and has a normal symbol starting port for detecting a passing game ball therein. A sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) is formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol starting port 37 is formed only on the right downflow path 3c side, and is not formed on the left downflow path 3b side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be formed only in the left flow path 3b, or may be formed in each of the two flow paths.

  In the middle of the route from the normal symbol starting port 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right downflow route 3c, a special variable prize in which the large winning port 50 can be opened or enlarged by a squeezing type opening door 52b can be opened or enlarged. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, inside which is formed a special winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball entering the special winning opening 50.

  The periphery of the special winning opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms a downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. I have. When the special winning opening 50 is closed by the opening door 52b (the special winning opening closed state), a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 is formed, so that the downstream guiding portion ( A part of the upper side 55a) is formed. In the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, in a region above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, more precisely, in a game region above the special winning opening 50, the flow path correction plate is almost parallel to the flow direction of the game ball. 51d is provided so as to project the flowing game balls in the direction of the special winning opening 50.

  The process of entering a game ball into the special winning opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the play area between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5 projects on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. It flows down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d protruding from the game board 3, whereby the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction of the special winning opening 50 (downward). At this time, if the special winning opening 50 is covered with the protruding and retracting type open door 52b (the special winning opening closed state), the game ball rolls thereon, and furthermore, a predetermined arrangement (not shown) is formed. The game nail is guided in the direction of the tulip-type ordinary variable winning device 41 (lower starting port 35). At this time, if the lower starting port 35 is in a winable state (starting port open state), a game ball can win the lower starting port 35. On the other hand, if the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the special winning opening 50 is open (the special winning opening is open), the game ball is guided into the special winning opening 50. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player has aimed at the launch position on the special variable winning device 52 side (when the player has aimed at the game ball so as to pass through the right downflow path 3c), the upper starting is performed. A game ball is hardly guided or not guided to the mouth 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win the starting openings 34 and 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the ordinary variable winning device 41 operates.

  If the above-mentioned winning means belongs to which of the left and right flowing paths, that is, whether the game ball flowing down the left flowing path 3b or the right flowing path 3c can win, the winning means belonging to the left flowing path 3b are classified. There are an upper starting port 34, a lower starting port 35, and three general winning ports 43 on the left side. Winning means belonging to the right flow path 3c include an upper starting port 34, a lower starting port 35, and a normal symbol starting port. 37, a large winning opening 50, and one general winning opening 43 on the right side.

  The lower starting port 35 belongs to both the left flow path 3b and the right flow path 3c when the movable wing piece 47 is open (start port open state), and can win a prize from any of the left and right flow paths. It has become. However, since the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35 has an operating condition of passing a game ball (winning) to the ordinary symbol starting port 37 located on the right side of the gaming area 3a, the movable wing piece 47 substantially flows down to the right. It can be said that it belongs only to the route 3c. The upper starting port 34 generally belongs to the left-downflow path 3b or only the left-downflow path 3b, and it is difficult or impossible to win a game ball from the right-downflow path 3c. That is, the arrangement of the game nails and other game parts in the game area 3a is based on the game ball (including the game ball passing through the stage of the center decoration 48) flowing down the left flow path 3b. The game ball that can be guided to the right downflow path 3c but can be guided to the upper starting port 34 is formed so as to form a guide path that is difficult or not guided to the upper starting port 34. In addition, the large winning opening 50 belongs to only the right down flow path 3c, and only the game balls from the right down flow path 3c can win.

  Each winning opening such as the upper starting opening 34, the lower starting opening 35, the ordinary symbol starting opening 37, the large winning opening 50, or the general winning opening 43 functions as a winning means arranged in the game area 3a, The detection switch (winning detection switch) such as the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the ordinary symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the big winning opening sensor 52a, or the general winning opening sensor 43a is a game that has entered the winning means. It functions as winning detection means for detecting a ball.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if there is a prize in any of the various prize ports provided in the game area 3a other than the normal symbol start port 37, the prize is promised for each prize port. The number of prize balls per winning ball (for example, three upper starting ports 34 or lower starting ports 35, thirteen large winning ports 50, and ten general winning ports 43) is equal to the game ball payout device 19 (FIG. 3)). In addition, the game ball which does not win each winning opening is discharged from the gaming area 3a through the out opening 49. Here, the "winning" is not a structure in which the winning opening takes in the game ball therein, or a structure in which the winning opening takes in the game ball therein, but a winning opening formed of a pass-type gate (for example, the normal symbol starting port 37). In the case of, it means that the game ball passes through the gate, and in fact, when a game ball is detected by each of the winning detection switches formed for each winning port, "winning" is displayed in the winning port. Treated as having occurred. The game balls related to the winning are also referred to as “winning balls”.

<Movable object>
In the area of the game board, a plurality of movable bodies having a visual effect are arranged at positions not obstructing the flow of the game ball. In this example, the first movable body role (clock-type role) 80 is disposed at the upper right side of the center decoration 48, that is, at a position where the flow of the game ball passing through the right flow down path 3c is not obstructed. A second movable body accessory (flower-shaped accessory 90) is provided on the side. Further, a third movable body (a semi-transparent spherical movable body 73 containing the rotating lamp 62 and the light emitting device) is integrally incorporated in the frame effect button 13 so as to be able to swing and rotate. The frame effect button 13 is a normal button 13A (first effect button) or a rotating light button 66 (second effect button: depending on the orientation of the built-in movable body 73 at rest (the position of the surface visible to the player). The movable body 73 functions as an exhilarating button 70 (third effect button: rolling button) when the movable body 73 is rotating forward. In addition, the exhilarating button (rolling button) 70 has a structure in which the movable body 73 is rotatably and rollably incorporated in or below the push button type cylinder 72, so that it can be used as the third movable body. Function. These movable bodies are operated in a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect or a reach effect), and are used as an effect means for increasing the expectation of winning a big hit.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device that controls the game operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

  The control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment receives a production control command from the main control unit (main control unit) 20 that comprehensively controls game operation control, and outputs image, light, and sound. Effect control unit (effect control means) 24 for overall controlling the effect operation control (effect appearance control for the effect means), a payout control board (payout control means) 29 for performing payout control of award balls, and an external power supply (Not shown) and a power supply board (power supply control means) 31 for generating and supplying power required for the gaming machine. Further, a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. Note that the power supply route is omitted in FIG.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 includes a microprocessor having a built-in CPU 201 (main control CPU) and a ROM 202 (main control ROM) and a RAM 203 (main control RAM). ).

  The ROM 202 functions as a storage unit (main control side storage unit) for storing game data related to the game operation control, and stores a control program describing a game operation control procedure and various data necessary for the game operation control. ing. Further, the RAM 203 functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data necessary for the progress of the game is stored and used according to the processing state. Further, the RAM 203 functions as a random number counter used for a specific lottery (for example, a variation pattern lottery relating to a special symbol), and functions as a random number generating unit that generates a random number by software.

  Although not shown, the main control unit 20 includes a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) for providing a periodic interrupt, a pulse output generation function (bit rate generator) and a time measurement function to the Z80 system, and a CPU to the Z80 system. It also has an interrupt controller circuit and a counter circuit that exhibit an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt for giving an interrupt signal. The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number within a certain range in terms of hardware, and a sampling circuit that samples a random number value at a predetermined timing from the random number generation circuit. work. By sending an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, the CPU 201 acquires the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number value (the size of the random number: 65536), and Use for lottery.

  The main control unit 20 includes an upper starting port 34a for detecting a prize to the upper starting port 34, a lower starting port sensor 35a for detecting a prize to the lower starting port 35, and detecting passage of the ordinary symbol starting port 37. The normal symbol starting port sensor 37a, the special winning opening sensor 52a detecting the winning in the special winning opening 50, the general winning opening sensor 43a detecting the winning in the general winning opening 43, and the misconduct with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1 ( The main control unit 20 is connected to a fraudulent detection sensor 99 for detecting a gossip, and can receive a detection signal therefrom.

  The main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35, and a special winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening and closing of the open door 52b of the special winning opening 50. Are connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling these.

  Further, a special symbol display device 38a and a special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling display of the special symbol. The main control unit 20 is connected to a normal symbol display device 39a, which can transmit a control signal for controlling display of the normal symbols.

  In addition, a composite display device 38c and a round number display device 39b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling display of information displayed thereon. . Round number display device 39b

  The main control unit 20 is connected to an external centralized terminal board 21 for a frame. The main control unit 20 provides information on the progress of the game (for example, jackpot winning information, prize ball number information, symbol variation display game execution frequency information, and the like). Can be transmitted to the hall computer HC installed outside the gaming machine via the external centralized terminal board 21 for the frame.

  In addition, the main control unit 20 can transmit various effect control commands including information on the special symbol change display game and information on the error to the effect control unit 24 according to the processing state. The effect control command from the main control unit 20 is directed by one-way communication in order to prevent an unauthorized signal due to an external goto action from being input to the main control unit 20 via the effect control unit 24. It is transmitted to the control unit 24.

  A payout control board (payout control section) 29 is connected to the main control section 20. The payout control board 29 includes a launch control board (fire launch control section) 28 for controlling the firing device 32, and a payout of game balls. Is connected to a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19. The main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting a control command regarding payout (a payout control command designating the number of winning balls) to the payout control board 29. The main role of the payout control board 29 is to receive a payout control command from the main control unit 20, control the prize ball payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, and transmit a payout state signal to the main control unit 20. And so on.

  A payout control board (payout control section) 29 is connected to the main control section 20. The payout control board 29 includes a launch control board (fire launch control section) 28 for controlling the firing device 32, and a payout of game balls. Is connected to a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19. The main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting a control command regarding payout (a payout control command designating the number of winning balls) to the payout control board 29. The main role of the payout control board 29 is to receive a payout control command from the main control unit 20, and to control the prize ball payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command (control of the payout motor that drives the ball payout mechanism). ), Transmission of a payout state signal to the main control unit 20, and the like.

  The payout control board 29 can transmit a firing control signal to the firing control board 28. The launch control board 28 controls energization of a launch solenoid (not shown) provided in the launch device 32 based on the launch control signal to realize a game ball launch operation by operating the launch operation handle 15. .

(2-2. Effect control unit 24)
The effect control unit 24 includes a microprocessor having a built-in CPU 241 (effect control CPU) and a microcomputer including a ROM 242 (effect control ROM) and a RAM 243 (effect control RAM). An interrupt controller circuit having an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibiting function) such as a sound source IC, a CTC, and a timer interrupt, a counter circuit for generating a random number by hardware, and the like are provided. The ROM 242 functions as storage means (storage control side storage means) for storing game data related to the rendering operation control, and stores various data necessary for the rendering operation control in addition to the rendering control program in which the rendering control procedure is described. Have been. Further, the RAM 243 functions as a work area or a buffer memory, and data necessary for producing an effect is stored and used according to a processing state. Further, the RAM 203 functions as a random number counter of the random number for the effect lottery used for the lottery of the effect, and functions as a random number generating unit that generates a random number by software.

  The main role of the effect control unit 24 is to receive an effect control command from the main control unit 20, to select an effect based on the effect control command, to control the image display of the liquid crystal display device 36, to control the sound of the speaker 46, to provide a decorative lamp. Light emission control of the LED 45 and various LEDs (effect LEDs: not shown), operation control of the movable body, and the like.

  The effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls display of the liquid crystal display device 36. The display control unit includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) that controls overall image output processing such as image expansion processing and image rendering, and an image ROM that stores image data (effect image data) on which the VDP performs image expansion processing. A VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores image data developed by the VDP, a liquid crystal control CPU that outputs control data necessary for the VDP to perform display control, and a display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU. It mainly comprises a liquid crystal control ROM for storing the described program and various data necessary for its display control, and a liquid crystal control RAM functioning as a work area and a buffer memory.

  In addition, the effect control unit 24 includes a decorative lamp 45, a clock board unit (numerical display unit) 81 of a clock-type accessory 80, and various LEDs in order to present various effects (light effects, sound effects, and movable body effects). , A sound control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generator 46a including the speaker 46, various movable bodies (a clock-type accessory 80, a flower-type accessory 90, a rotating light). 62, a movable control unit (motor drive circuit) for the movable body part motors 61, 61a, 61b, 63 for operating the movable body 73 and the like. Here, the movable body accessory motor 61 is for driving a clock hand 82 constituting the watch-shaped accessory 80, and the movable body accessory motors 61a and 61b are for driving the movable bodies 91 and 92 constituting the flower-shaped accessory 90. The movable body part motor 63 is for driving the reflecting mirror 62b constituting the rotary light 62, and the movable body part motor 73a is for driving the movable body 73 constituting the rolling button 70. The effect control unit 24 is capable of transmitting control signals relating to effect means to these drive control units.

  The effect control unit 24 is connected to a position detection switch 97 for the clock hand 82 and position detection switches 97a and 97b for the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 of the flower pattern accessory 90. 24 is capable of receiving detection signals from these. The production control unit 24 controls the operation mode while monitoring the current operation position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position) of the movable body based on the detection signals from the position detection switches 97, 97a, 97b. In addition, the operation of the movable body object is monitored for malfunctions (whether it is normal operation (for example, whether it returns to the origin position correctly after operation)).

  The effect control unit 24 is connected to switches of first and second effect buttons operable by a player, that is, a switch of the frame effect button 13 and a rotary light switch 65. The effect control unit 24 includes these effect buttons. Operation detection signals from 13A and 13A can be received.

  The production control unit 24 determines, based on the production control command sent from the main control unit 20, by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of prepared production patterns, and controls various production means at necessary timing. I do. As a result, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, the drive of lighting the decoration lamp 45 and the LED, and the blinking of the LED are realized, and various effect patterns (decorative pattern variation display, advance notice) ) Are developed in a time series, thereby realizing a "production scenario" in a broad sense.

  The effect control command defines a function with a 2-byte configuration including a 1-byte mode (MODE) and a 1-byte event (EVENT). To distinguish MODE and EVENT, Bit7 of MODE is used. Bit7 of ON and EVENT is OFF. When transmitting such information as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and performs the first time after a predetermined time elapses from this setting. Is transmitted. Further, event (EVENT) information is set and output after a lapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and a second transmission of the strobe signal is performed after a lapse of a predetermined time from the setting. The strobe signal is controlled to an active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (production control CPU) can reliably receive a command.

  The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal, executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing, and acquires an effect control command in the interrupt processing. Has become. Also, unlike the CPU 201, when an interrupt occurs based on the input of a strobe signal, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process based on another interrupt (a timer interrupt process that is periodically executed). Even if there is, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if other interrupts occur at the same time.

<3. Outline of operation>
Next, a gaming operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol change display game)
(3-1-1. Special design variation display game, decorative design variation display game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 executes a predetermined starting condition, specifically, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35 (winning). , A "big hit lottery" by random number lottery is performed. The main control unit 20 displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b based on the result of the lottery and starts the special symbol variation display game. The display is displayed on the device, and the special symbol variation display game is thereby terminated.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery based on the winning in the upper starting port 34 and the jackpot lottering based on the winning in the lower starting port 35 are performed separately and independently. For this reason, the jackpot lottery result for the upper starting port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the jackpot lottery result for the lower starting port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the special symbol display device 38a side, on condition that a game ball has entered the upper starting port 34, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed to start the first special symbol variability display game, On the special symbol display device 38b side, on condition that a game ball has entered the lower starting port 35, the special symbol 2 is variably displayed, and the second special symbol variance display game is started. . Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variation display time has elapsed, if the jackpot lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined “big hit” In this mode, in other cases, the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in a predetermined "losing" mode, whereby the game result (big hit lottery result) is derived and displayed.

  In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol display game on the special symbol display device 38a is referred to as "special symbol display game 1", and the second special symbol display game 38b on the special symbol display device 38b is used. The variation display game is referred to as “special symbol variation display game 2”. Unless otherwise required, “special symbol 1” and “special symbol 2” are simply referred to as “special symbols” (sometimes abbreviated as “special symbols”), and “special symbol variation display game 1” and “special symbols”. The symbol variation display game 2 "is simply referred to as a" special symbol variation display game. "

  Also, when the above-mentioned special symbol variation display game is started, a decoration symbol (a staging game symbol) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in a variable manner, and a decoration symbol variation display game is started. Various effects are developed. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, and the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating a jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorative pattern that has been displayed is derived and displayed. In other words, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the stunning decorative symbol variation display game including the decorative symbol variation display operation.

  Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol change display game is “big hit” (when the big hit lottery result is “big hit”), an effect reflecting the result is developed in the decorative symbol change display game. When the special symbol display device is stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the special symbol indicates a big hit (for example, the display state of 7-segment is “7”), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays “left”, “middle”, “right”. In each display area, the decorative pattern reflects the "big hit" (for example, in each display area of "left", "middle" and "right", three decorative patterns are "7", "7" and " 7 is displayed).

  When this "big hit" is reached, specifically, the special symbol change display game ends, and the decorative symbol change display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the symbol mode of "big hit" is derived and displayed. Then, the special winning opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variable winning device 52 operates to open and close the opening door 52b in a predetermined operation pattern, thereby opening and closing the special winning opening 50, and starting the normal game state. Also, a special game state (big hit game) advantageous to the player occurs. In this jackpot game, the opening door 52b allows the opening time of the special winning opening to elapse a predetermined time (maximum opening time: for example, 29.8 seconds) or the number of game balls winning the special winning opening (the special winning opening). 50 winning prize balls) a predetermined number (maximum winning number: the upper limit of the number of prize balls allowed for the winning opening which is opened or enlarged by one operation of the accessory: for example, 9) Until the winning area is opened or expanded, and if any of these conditions is satisfied, the special winning opening is closed. Round) repeated. The condition for closing the special winning opening 50 is not limited thereto, and may be based on only the opening time of the special winning opening, or may be based only on the number of game balls winning the special winning opening. Is also good.

  When the big hit game starts, an opening effect for notifying that a big hit has started is performed first, and after the opening effect ends, a round game is performed one or more times with a predetermined number of rounds as an upper limit. . Then, after the end of the prescribed number of rounds, an ending effect notifying that the big hit is ended is performed, and the big hit game is thereby ended. That is, the big hit game is roughly divided into each of the game periods of the opening effect, the round game, and the ending effect. However, the round game execution period excluding the opening effect period and the ending effect period in which the special winning opening is closed may be regarded as the big hit game period.

  Regarding the information necessary for the execution of the above-described decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 determines that the game ball has entered (wins) the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35, and specifically, On the condition that a game ball is detected by the upper starting port sensor 34a or the lower starting port sensor 35a and a starting condition (a starting condition relating to a special symbol) is established, a lottery is selected as either a "big hit" or a "losing". You can select 'winning lottery (winning / winning type lottery)' and, if it is a “big hit”, select the big hit type. If it is “losing”, draw the loss type. 'Symbol lottery (hit (winning) type lottery) (If there is only one type of loss, it is not necessary to perform the type of loss, so that the lottery can be omitted.) Based on the result of the lottery, the special pattern fluctuation pattern N'ya, a final decision special symbols to be stopped and displayed (special stop symbol). Then, as a production control command for specifying the processing state, the production control unit 24 side transmits a “variation pattern designation command” including at least fluctuation pattern information of a special symbol (for example, information on a jackpot lottery result, fluctuation time of the special symbol, etc.). Send. Thereby, the basic information required for the decorative symbol change display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In the present embodiment, a “decorative symbol designating command” including information on special stop symbols (symbol lottery result information (information on hit type)) is also transmitted to the effect controller 24 in order to enrich the effect variations. ing.

  The fluctuation pattern information of the special symbol can include information designating the occurrence of a specific notice effect (reach effect, pseudo-sequence effect, etc., described later) in addition to the jackpot lottery result information. In detail, the variation pattern of the special symbol is roughly classified into a “hit variation pattern” in the case of a hit and a “loss variation pattern” in the case of a loss according to the jackpot lottery result information. Are, for example, a fluctuation pattern for specifying a reach effect (reach fluctuation pattern) that specifies occurrence of a reach effect, a fluctuation pattern for specifying a non-reach effect that does not specify occurrence of a reach effect (normal fluctuation pattern), a pseudo continuous effect, and a reach effect. Reach fluctuation pattern for specifying pseudo compound production (reach fluctuation pattern with pseudo reams) that specifies compound occurrences, and normal fluctuation pattern for specifying pseudo pseudo renditions that do not specify the occurrence of reach renditions (A normal variation pattern with a pseudo run) can be included. In addition, the reach fluctuation pattern and the pseudo-repeated fluctuation pattern are basically determined so that the fluctuation time is longer than the normal fluctuation pattern because of the effect of designating an effect that can stimulate the expectation of winning a big hit. .

  The effect control unit 24 performs a time-series operation during the decorative design change display game based on information included in the effect control commands (here, the change pattern designating command and the decorative design designating command) sent from the main control unit 20. Decision effect (decision scenario) to be developed in the game and the decoration pattern (decoration stop pattern) to be finally stopped and displayed, and the decoration pattern is fluctuated and displayed according to the time schedule based on the special pattern fluctuating pattern. Is executed. In this way, the decorative symbols on the liquid crystal display device 36 are variably displayed in time synchronization with the special symbols variably displayed by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variance display game and during the decorative symbol variance display game Is substantially the same time width. The effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generation device 46a, respectively, so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative design change display game. Thereby, the reproduction of the image (image effect), the reproduction of the sound effect (sound effect), and the lighting and blinking drive (light effect) of the decorative lamp 45, the LED, and the like on the liquid crystal display device 36 are realized.

  As described above, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the one reflecting the display result of the special symbol variation display game is to be expressed in the decoration symbol variation display game. The two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In the present specification, the two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as “symbol variation display games” unless otherwise required.

(3-1-2. Normal design fluctuation display game)
Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the “main assistance unit lottery” is performed in the main control unit 20 based on the fact that the game ball has passed (prize) through the normal symbol starting port 37. Based on this lottery result, the ordinary symbol represented by the LED is displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 39a in a variable manner to start the ordinary symbol variation display game. And stop display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is “auxiliary hit”, the display portion of the normal symbol display device 39a is turned on in a specific lighting state (for example, all the two LEDs 39 are on or “○” and “「 ”). The stop display is performed when the LED on the “○” side of the LED expressing “x” is turned on).

  When the "assistance hit" occurs, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) operates, whereby the movable wing piece 47 opens in an inverted "C" shape and the lower starting port 35 is opened. Alternatively, the game ball is enlarged to be in a state where the game ball easily flows in (starting port opened state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter, referred to as a “generic power opening game”) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In this open-duty opening game, the movable wing 47 of the normal fluctuation winning device 41 waits until the opening time of the lower starting port 35 elapses a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) or the lower starting port 35 is won. Until the number of game balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, four), the winning area is opened or expanded, and when any of these conditions is satisfied, the lower starting port 35 is closed for a predetermined number of times (for example, , Up to two times). The condition that the lower starting port 35 is closed is not limited thereto, and may be based on only the opening time of the lower starting port, or may be based only on the number of game balls that have won the lower starting port. Is also good. Further, as the auxiliary hit, a plurality of types of auxiliary hits having different opening times and / or times of opening of the lower starting port 35 may be determined as a normal power opening game mode.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the special / decorative symbol variation display game, during the normal symbol variation display game, during the jackpot game, or during the open electric game, the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35 or the normal symbol starting port. When a prize is generated, that is, when a detection signal is input from the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, or the ordinary symbol starting opening sensor 37a, and the corresponding starting condition (symbol game starting condition) is satisfied. This is stored as a data relating to the right to start the variable display game, up to a predetermined upper limit of the maximum number of stored storages (for example, up to four), except for data related to the variable display game. . The pending data on hold that has not been subjected to the symbol change display operation or the game ball related to the pending data is also referred to as an “operation pending ball”. In order to clarify the number of the operation reserve balls to the player, a dedicated reserve display (not shown) provided at an appropriate position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a reserve provided as an icon image in a screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 Turn on the display.

  In the present embodiment, up to four operation-holding balls relating to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203 at the maximum, and are held as the number of times the special symbol or the normal symbol is changed. In addition, the maximum storage number (maximum reserved storage number) of the number of operation reserve balls related to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the ordinary symbol is not particularly limited, and a part or all of the maximum reserved storage number of each symbol is different. (For example, the maximum number of reserved storages on the special symbol 1 side is four, the maximum number of reserved storages on the special symbol 2 side is two, and the maximum reserved storage number on the ordinary symbol side is six). In addition, regarding the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the maximum number of reserved storages on the symbol side where the profit obtained by the jackpot lottery is relatively high may be set. In the present embodiment, since the jackpot lottery relating to the special symbol 2 can obtain a jackpot type having a relatively high profit for the player, for example, the maximum number of retained memories of the special symbol 1 is two, and the special symbol 2 is The maximum number of pending storages may be set to four, which is larger than that.

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the gaming state will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the special jackpot which is a special gaming state. To facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to occurrence of various game states will be described.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a “probability variation (hereinafter abbreviated as“ probability ”) function” in which the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) plays a functional part. There are two types of functions, a positive change function relating to a special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a "special symbol positive change function") and a positive change function relating to a normal symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a "normal pattern positive change function").

  The special symbol probability changing function changes the lottery probability of the big hit from a low probability (for example, 1/397) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 39.7 times), so that the large gaming lot is changed from the normal gaming state. Is a function that generates an advantageous “high probability state”. Under the gaming state (high probability state) in which the special symbol probability changing function is operating, the big hit lottery probability becomes high, so that a big hit is easily generated. Therefore, it can be said that the gaming state expected by the player is a gaming state in which the special symbol probability changing function is operating. The details of the operation start condition and the operation end condition of the special symbol change function will be described later.

  The normal symbol probability changing function changes the lottery probability per assist from a low probability (for example, 2/256), which is a predetermined probability (normal probability), to a high probability (for example, 255/256), so that the lottery probability is higher than the normal gaming state. This is a function to generate an advantageous “assisted hit change state”. Under the game state in which the normal symbol probability changing function is operating (probability change status per auxiliary), since the lottery probability per auxiliary is in a high probability state, an auxiliary win is likely to occur, and the open electric game frequently occurs. In this state, the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is higher than that in the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the ordinary symbol time saving function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol time reduction function described later, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time reduction function. This is the same condition as the operation termination condition.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a “variable time reduction (hereinafter, referred to as“ time saving ”) function” in which the main control unit 20 functions as a functional unit. There are two types of time-saving functions related to special symbols (hereinafter, referred to as “special symbol time-saving functions”) and time-saving functions relating to ordinary symbols (hereinafter, referred to as “normal symbol time-saving functions”).

  The special symbol time saving function shortens the average time required for one special symbol change display game (the average time from the start of the change of the special symbol to the final display (the average change time of the special symbol)). This is a function to generate the "special symbol time reduction state". In a game state in which the special symbol time-saving function is activated (special symbol time-saving state), the average fluctuation time of the special symbol in one special symbol fluctuation display game is shortened (for example, the average time required for the loss fluctuation without reach). Is shortened from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), and a lottery number improvement state in which the number of jackpots per unit time is higher than in the normal game state is established. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol may be shortened due to the difference in the number of active balls, but in this case, the special symbol time-saving state is not generated. (For example, a fluctuation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) and the number of operation-reserved balls, which will be described later).

  The normal symbol time saving function is the average time required for one normal symbol change display game (the average time from the start of the change of the normal symbol to the final display (average change time of the normal symbol)). This is a function to generate the "normal design time saving state" to be shortened. In a game state in which the normal symbol time saving function is activated (ordinary symbol time saving state), the average variation time of the ordinary symbol in one ordinary symbol variation display game is reduced (for example, from 10 seconds to 1 second). ), A lottery frequency improvement state in which the number of lotteries per auxiliary per unit time is higher than in the normal game state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be shortened due to the difference in the number of operation-holding balls, but in this case, the normal symbol time-saving state is not generated. This is due to the control processing of. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the normal symbol time reduction function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol time reduction function, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time reduction function. This is the same condition as the operation end condition.

  Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with an “open extension function” in which the main control unit 20 functions as a functional unit.

  The opening extension function is a function of generating an “open extension state” in which the opening operation period (at least one of the opening time and the number of times of opening of the movable wing piece 47) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal fluctuation winning device 41 is extended. is there. This open extended state is referred to as a “state with power support” or a “support state”. In the game state in which the opening extension function is activated (open extension state), the opening operation period (starting port opening state time) of the movable wing piece 47 is extended from 0.2 seconds to 1.7 seconds, for example. The number of times of opening / closing is extended, for example, from once (when the opening extension function is not operating) to twice (when the opening extension function is operating), and the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is longer than in the normal game state. Is in an operation rate improvement state in which the operation rate of the operation is improved. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the opening extension function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol time reduction function described above, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time reduction function. This is the same condition as the operation end condition. Therefore, during the open extended state, the normal symbol certainty changing function and the normal symbol time saving function also act, and a gaming state in which the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 is significantly improved occurs.

  By activating one or more of the above functions, it is possible to change the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. Here, in this embodiment, since the operation start conditions of the normal symbol time-change function, the normal symbol time-saving function, and the opening extension function are the same as the operation start conditions of the special symbol time-saving function, each function operates at the same opportunity. Will do. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the game state in which the special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time saving function, and opening extension function operate is referred to as `` probable variation state '', and from among these functions, The game state in which the special symbol probability changing function is removed is referred to as "time saving state", and the game state in which only the special symbol probability changing function operates is referred to as the "latency probability changing state (latent or latent state)", and all functions are not operating. The (non-operating) state is referred to as a “normal gaming state”. Therefore, paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability in these game states, when the game state is the “time saving state” or “normal game state”, the jackpot lottery probability becomes “low probability state” and the game state becomes “ In the case of “state” or “probable state”, the jackpot lottery probability becomes “high probability state”. In addition, during the big hit related to the condition device operation, a hit game in which the big winning opening is opened / closed occurs, but all of the above functions are deactivated, and basically the same game state as the above normal game state Put down.

(3-2-1. High base game state)
In the present embodiment, the functions related to the above-mentioned ordinary symbols, that is, the ordinary symbol probability changing function, the ordinary symbol time saving function, and the opening extension function are the same conditions as the operation start conditions of the special symbol time saving function. Will operate on the same occasion. However, when attention is paid to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol change function, ordinary symbol time-saving function, and opening extension function individually, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 is improved. Since the activation rate is increased and the winning frequency to the lower starting port 35 is increased, as the gaming state, the frequency of establishment of the starting condition of the special symbol change display game for deriving the jackpot lottery result is higher than that in the normal gaming state. Base game state (start condition improvement state) ". The “high base game state” here means a game state when a function related to a normal symbol is operated, and at least one of a function related to a special symbol, that is, a special symbol change function and a special symbol time reduction function is activated. It is different from the game state when playing.

  On the other hand, when focusing on the functions related to special symbols (special symbol probability changing function and special symbol time saving function) individually, when the above-mentioned special symbol probability changing function is activated, the big hitting lottery probability becomes “high probability state” which is higher than the normal gaming state. When the special symbol time saving function is activated, the special symbol variation display game is completed in the "special symbol time saving state" in which the digestion time is earlier than in the normal game state. In this point, it is distinguished from the above-mentioned "high base game state" in which the start condition of the special symbol change display game is established more frequently than in the normal game state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as an example of the “high base gaming state”, the electric chew support state provided with at least the opening extension function is treated as the “high base gaming state”. Under the electric tue support state, the operating rate (opening time and number of times of opening) of the movable wing piece 47 of the ordinary variable winning device 41 is improved, the winning rate to the lower starting port 35 is increased, and the winning frequency per unit time is increased. As a result, the gaming state is more advantageous for the player than in the case where the electric chew is not in the supporting state (low base gaming state). Focusing on the presence or absence of the electric tuner support, if the gaming state is "normal gaming state" or "latent state", it will be "state without electric tuner support (hereinafter also referred to as" state without electric support ")" On the other hand, when the gaming state is the "time saving state" or the "probable change state", the state is "the state with electric power support" (hereinafter also referred to as "the state with electric power support"). In addition, the game state focusing on the operation status of the functions related to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability, the presence or absence of electric support, etc. (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time saving function, ordinary symbol probability changing function, ordinary symbol time saving function, opening extension function) Is referred to as an “internal gaming state”. A “game state determination number (YJ)” is provided as data for identifying the internal game state.

  For the sake of convenience, as described later, for the sake of convenience, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the probable state is “probable jackpot”, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the time reduction state is “hour jackpot”, and the transition to the latent state The big hit that is referred to as "the latent big hit" is referred to as the "big hit", and the big hit that triggers the transition to the normal state is called the "normal big hit". At least a big hit that triggers a transition to a gaming state with a high base state (probable state or time saving state) is called a "big hit with electric support", and a gaming state without a high base state (a latent state or a normal gaming state). The big hit that triggers the transition to may be referred to as a “big hit without electricity support”.

  Here, in order to realize various effects related to the above-mentioned internal game state, a “variation pattern selection mode (hereinafter, referred to as a“ variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) ”)” described below is used. Can be further classified and managed. For example, for the "probable change state (low-probability, no power support)", a plurality of types of probable change states such as "probable change A", "probable change B", and "probable change C" are set and managed as different game states. be able to. For details, the operation status of the functions related to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time saving function, ordinary symbol probability changing function, ordinary symbol time saving function, and opening extension function), When paying attention to the “game state”, each of the game states “probable change A”, “probable change B”, and “probable change C” (variable pattern distribution) with respect to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol while being the same “probable change state”. A desired variation pattern can be selected from unique variation pattern types (one or more types of variation patterns) corresponding to the designated number (Tcode). Due to this, on the side of the effect control unit 24, effect modes corresponding to the respective game states of “probable change A”, “probable change B”, and “probable change C” are provided, and effects under these effect modes are generated. (The details of the effect mode will be described later). Thereby, even under the same internal game state, the change pattern of the special symbol corresponding to the change pattern selection mode can be selected. It can bring significant changes to related performances. For convenience of explanation, unless otherwise required, the above “internal gaming state” and the gaming state (variation pattern distribution designation number (variation pattern distribution designation number) when focusing on the determination of special pattern fluctuation pattern (decision of production)) Tcode))), and may simply be referred to as “game state”.

  The “variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode)” is used as data for identifying the current game state. When selecting the special pattern change pattern, the jackpot lottery result and the change pattern assignment designation number (Tcode) are referred to, and the target change pattern according to the current game state is selected. (See step S412 (special symbol variation pattern creation processing) in FIG. 12 described later). For example, in the case of the ST machine type of Embodiment 4 described later (section f in FIG. 24), when the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) is “00H”, “normal (normal state)” is set, and during the ST period. When the internal game state is in the probable change state, "01H" means "ST first half (probable change)", "02H" means "ST second half (probable change)", and "03H" means "03H". "ST final (probable change)" is set to indicate "CZ" in the case of "04H", and to "latent state" in the case of "05H". As described above, by using different values as the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), the same probable change state is divided into a plurality of types of probable change states of “first half of ST”, “second half of ST”, and “last of ST”. Can be managed as sections of different effect modes. Therefore, the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) is not necessarily changed with a change in the internal game state, but is changed when a predetermined game state change condition is satisfied. In this regard, the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) is different from data that changes with a change in the internal game state, such as a “game state determination number (YJ)” that identifies the internal game state itself.

<4. About hits>
Next, the “hit” of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

(4-1. About hit type: Fig. 4)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment performs a large hit lottery (hit lottery) for a plurality of types of hits. The hit type is different between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the hit types in the case of the special symbol 1 are "15R long open probability large hit", "2R short open latent large hit", and "small hit". As shown in FIG. 4 (b), the hit type is only "15R long open probability variable big hit".

  Among these hits, big hits such as “15R long open probability big hit” and “2R short open latent big hit (2R latent big hit)” are hits belonging to the “big hit” type that triggers the operation of the condition device, “Small hit” is a hit belonging to the “non-big hit” type that does not trigger the operation of the condition device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the continuous action device for performing a round game, and a combination of specific special symbols is displayed, or a game ball is displayed. It is activated when the vehicle passes a specific area within the special winning opening. The hits belonging to the "big hit" type and the hits belonging to the "non-big hit" type (small hits) are all triggered (shifted) to a special game state (hit game) involving opening / closing operation of a special winning opening. It is a hit. Therefore, hits belonging to the “non-big hit” type are different from mere “losing”.

  Among the hits belonging to the 'big hit' type, the “15R long open big hit (15R positive big hit)” and “2R short open latent big hit” include at least the high probability state of the game state after the end of the big hit game. It is a big hit type belonging to “probably big hit” for shifting to the bonus game state (in the present embodiment, the probable state or the latent state). “Small hit” is a hit type for continuing the gaming state at the time of winning. Although the "small hit" is a hit belonging to the "non-big hit" type, for convenience of explanation, it is handled in the same row as one of the big hit types without being distinguished from the above-mentioned big hit unless particularly required.

  If any of the above jackpots is won, the special symbols on the special symbol display device 38 are displayed as they are, reflecting the lottery results. In other words, the special symbol display device 38 displays a special symbol for notifying the probability change big hit, a special symbol for notifying the loss, or a special symbol notifying the small hit. On the other hand, on the liquid crystal display device 36, a symbol game corresponding to the special symbol variation display game is displayed using another symbol called a decorative symbol.

(4-2. Winning game)
Next, the hit game by each hit described above will be described.

(4-2-1.15R length open game)
A winning game with a 15R long open jackpot game (hereinafter, referred to as a “15R odd jackpot game”) is a jackpot with a specified number of rounds of 15 rounds. The maximum release time is set to “29.8 seconds” of “long release time”. The open / close pattern in which the maximum open time is set to the “long open time” as described above is referred to as a “long open pattern”. Here, the “long opening time” means that the number of winnings to the special winning opening may reach the maximum winning number (for example, 9) within that time (there is a possibility that the maximum winning number is reached). It is defined as the time width.

  After the round game starts and the special winning opening 50 is opened, if the above maximum opening time elapses, the special winning opening 50 is closed and the current round game is completed, and the number of the prescribed rounds reaches 15 rounds. If not, the game proceeds to the next round game after a predetermined time (inter-round interval time) has elapsed. However, even before the maximum opening time elapses, if the number of game balls (number of winning balls) winning in the special winning opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number (for example, nine), the special winning opening 50 is closed. After the current round game ends and a predetermined time (inter-round interval time) has elapsed, the game is shifted to the next round game. In other words, when either the maximum opening time of the special winning opening has elapsed or when the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening reaches the maximum winning number, either of the conditions is satisfied. Is closed, and the game is shifted to the next round game after a predetermined interval time (the same applies to the case of “2R short open latent large hit” described later).

  After the round game starts and the special winning opening 50 is opened, if the above maximum opening time elapses, the special winning opening 50 is closed and the current round game is completed, and the number of the prescribed rounds reaches 15 rounds. If not, the game proceeds to the next round game after a predetermined time (inter-round interval time) has elapsed. However, even before the maximum opening time elapses, if the number of game balls (number of winning balls) winning in the special winning opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number (for example, nine), the special winning opening 50 is closed. After the current round game ends and a predetermined time (inter-round interval time) has elapsed, the game is shifted to the next round game. In other words, when either the maximum opening time of the special winning opening has elapsed or when the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening reaches the maximum winning number, one of the conditions is satisfied, Is closed, and the game is shifted to the next round game with a predetermined interval time between rounds (the same applies to the case of “2R short open latent large hit” described later). The “inter-round interval time” between round games is composed of “remaining ball discharging time” and “inter-open interval time” from the elapse of the remaining ball discharging time to the start of the next round game. . The “remaining ball discharging time” refers to a margin time (for example, 1980 ms) for discharging the remaining balls inside the special winning opening after the closing of the special winning opening.

(4-2-2.2R Short Open Latency Big Hit)
A hit game with a 2R short open latent big hit (hereinafter, referred to as a “2R latent big hit game”) is a big hit with a specified number of rounds of two, and in the present embodiment, a big winning port in one round game The maximum opening time of the (large winning opening 50) is set to 0.1 second of the "short opening time". Thus, the opening / closing pattern in which the maximum opening time is set to the above “short opening time” is referred to as “short opening pattern”. Therefore, in the 2R latent big hit game, since the big winning opening is opened only for a short opening time (0.1 second) and the number of round games is as small as two rounds, practically almost no prize balls are obtained. It is a jackpot game that is not possible (accurately, there is a possibility that a prize may be won in the big winning opening, but because the maximum opening time of the big winning opening of each round game is set to a short opening time, The likelihood is low).

  In addition, the hit during the 2R latent big hit game of the hit type on the special map 1 side (the effect that appears during the hit game) is the hit during the 2R short open small hit of the hit type on the special map 1 side The effect is substantially the same (same or very similar). In other words, the operation related to the hit game including the hit during the 2R short opening latent large hit shows the substantially same behavior as the game operation related to the 2R short opening small hit, and from the player's side, It is difficult or impossible to identify whether the game is being executed. As a result, even if a 2R short opening small hit is won, it is possible to give the player an expectation of winning a “2R short opening latent large hit” which triggers a transition to a high probability state. ing.

(4-2-3. Winning game by small hit)
In the hitting game with a small hit (hereinafter, referred to as "small hitting game"), the opening / closing operation of the big winning port viewed from the appearance is controlled in substantially the same operation mode as that of the 2R latent big hit game. It has become. More specifically, since the “small hit” is a hit type that does not trigger the “condition device” to operate, a round game like the “big hit” is not executed. However, by controlling the opening and closing of the special winning opening in substantially the same manner as the 2R latent big hit game, a pseudo round game is realized, and it looks as if the 2R short open latent big hit was won. It is possible to dress like this.

  In the small hit game, a hit effect during the 2R latent big hit game is substantially the same (same or very similar) as the hit effect during the big hit game. In other words, the operation related to the small hit game including the hit-medium effect shows substantially the same behavior as the game operation related to the 2R short open latent large hit, and from the player's side, either the stable change or the normal hit game is It is difficult or impossible to identify whether it is being performed. As a result, even when a small hit is won, the player can be given a sense of expectation of winning a "2R short open latent large hit" which is a trigger for shifting to a high probability state.

  In the above description, the maximum opening time is set to the short opening time in the 2R latent big hit game and the small hit game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same long opening time as that of the 15R probability-change jackpot game may be set so that the winning in the big winning opening is allowed to some extent, and it is difficult or impossible to reach the above-mentioned maximum winning number. An opening time (intermediate opening time shorter than the long opening time and longer than the short opening time: for example, 5 seconds) may be set so as to secure a certain number of winning balls to the winning opening. Further, the number of round games related to the big hit can be determined as appropriate. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the hit types of the special symbol 1 are “15R long open probability large hit”, “2R short open latent large hit”, and “small hit”. Although the hit type is described as only "15R open-variable big hit", the present invention is not limited to this, and one or more hit types of special symbols 1 and 2 can be determined.

(4-3. Game state after completion of hit game: FIG. 4)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, a description will be given of a game state which is shifted after each of the above hit games. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram provided for describing a gaming state to which a transition is made after each hitting game. Each of the illustrated game states is not an internal game state, but a game state focusing on the variation pattern selection mode (game state).

(4-3-1.15R probable change big hit game state after the game)
In the first embodiment, a "quickly falling type" gaming machine (FIG. 24 (a)) is used. After the 15R certain-variable big hit game is over, as shown in the drawing, a falling lottery is provided regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Is transferred to the “probable change state”, and thereafter, the probable change state is continued until the falling lottery is won.

  The “falling lottery” is mainly executed in a gaming state (for example, a probable change state or a latent state) in which a jackpot lottery probability is accompanied by a high probability state. When this drop lottery is won, the high probability state is ended and the state is shifted to the low probability state. In addition, the fall lottery may be executed when a "losing (may include a small hit)" is won in the big hit lottery (a big hit lottery priority type), or after the fall lottery is executed, the big hit lottery is executed. Yes (falling lottery priority type). In the latter case of the drop lottery priority type, in the present symbol change display game, the state is in a high probability state before the execution of the drop lottery, but it is won in the fall lottery, and in the case of executing the jackpot lottery, it is in a low probability state and it is a big hit. May be drawn by lottery. In the first to sixth embodiments, for convenience of explanation, a description will be given as a gaming machine adopting the latter falling lottery priority type.

  In the case of the above-mentioned "immediate fall type" gaming machine (FIG. 24 (a)), if the player wins the fall lottery in the present symbol variation display game, the high base gaming state (the state with the electric support) is also terminated, and the "no electric support" The state is shifted to a normal game state of "+ low probability state".

(4-3-2.2R Latent game state after big hit game, after small hit game)
In the case of a 2R latent big hit or a small hit, as shown in the figure, the game state after the end of the 2R latent big hit or the game state after the small hit game is ended is as follows.

  After the 2R latent big hit game, the game state of the transition destination is different depending on the game state at the time of winning, and in the case of the present embodiment, if the state is the “normal state”, “CZ (latency)” (Variable pattern selection mode is “CZ”, internal game state is “latent state”), if it is a latent state, it is “latent state”, “CZ (normal)” (variable pattern selection mode is “ (CZ), the internal game state is “normal state”), the state is “CZ (latent)”, and if the state is “CZ (latent)”, the state is “latent state”. In such a case, the state is shifted to the “probable change state”. If the gaming state at the time of winning is a latent state, the game state may be shifted to a positive change state.

  However, while the transition control of the “internal game state” due to the small hit winning is not performed, the transition control of the “game state (variation pattern selection mode)” related to the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol (determination of the effect) is performed. Using such a transition mode, for example, when the game state after the small hit game and the game state after the 2R latent big hit game are shifted to the same game state, an effect mode in which the same effect is performed on both sides ( (Secret effect mode), and even after the small hit game, it is possible to generate an effect in the same effect mode as after the 2R latent big hit game. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of entering a high probability state that the player may have won the 2R short open-latitude large hit and may have shifted to the “latent state” from the stage of the production. ing. The above “CZ” is used as a game state (variation pattern selection mode) for displaying the secret effect mode.

  When the above-mentioned “CZ (latent)” or “CZ (normal)” is reached, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game is completed until a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) is completed, or within the predetermined number of times. The "CZ" continues until a big hit occurs, and when the special symbol change display game ends without winning the falling lottery and the big hit is not fixed within the predetermined number of times, the "CZ" ends, In accordance with the internal game state, the game shifts from the next game to the “latent state” or the “normal game state”, and the internal game state is clarified from the presentation.

(4-3-4. In the case of the probable falling type 1 according to the second embodiment (sections b to c in FIG. 24))
In the case of the "probable falling type 1" according to the second embodiment (FIGS. 24 (b) and (c)), the player wins the probable big hit, and after the big hit game ends, goes into the probable changing state with a lottery (high probability, with electric support). This is the type to migrate. After shifting to the state of change with drop lottery after the end of the big hit game, the loss lottery is continued to be lost. If the big hit cannot be made within 100 revolutions of the electric support guarantee, the state shifts to the “no electric support” state. Here, the “electric support guarantee X times” is the number of times of execution of the special symbol variation display game (the number of variations of the special symbol. In this embodiment, the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (the special symbol 1 and 2 This means that the state with the electric support is guaranteed, regardless of whether or not the drop lottery has been won, until the total number of times of change) reaches the predetermined upper limit number (X times). However, when the big hit is determined (winned) within the predetermined upper limit number, the state with the electric support is guaranteed again the upper limit number.

  Therefore, when the number of executions of the special symbol change display game reaches a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), the electric support guarantee ends, and after that, the state with no electric support in the high probability state, that is, “ Into a latent state (high probability, no power support). If the lottery is won during the “probable state”, the state shifts from the high-probability state to the low-probability state, and the game state changes from the “probable state (high-probability, no power support)” to the “normal state ( (Low probability, no electricity support) ".

  Also, if the player wins the drop lottery during the probable change state (high probability, with electric support (100 electric guarantees)), the player falls from the high probability state to the low probability state, but the electric support does not disappear. Therefore, in this case, the state shifts from the “probable change state” to the “time saving state (low probability, with electric support)”, and if the big hit is not won until the remaining number of electric support guarantees is exhausted, the electric support state ends. Then, the state shifts from the “time reduction state” to the “normal state”.

  In addition, if a winning is achieved in a probability changing jackpot (for example, “15R long opening probability changing big hit” or “2R short opening latent probability big hit”) during 100 times of the electric support guarantee, the player enters the probability changing state again after the end of the game. . Therefore, as long as the jackpot is won in the high base game state (during the probable change state or the time saving state) with the electric support guaranteed number of times of 100, which is provided with the opening extension function, the next time, the 15R length is also used under the high base game state. You will be able to get the chance to open the jackpot.

(4-3-5. In the case of probable falling type 2 according to the third embodiment (sections d to e in FIG. 24))
In the case of the “probable change fall type 2” according to the third embodiment (FIGS. 24D and 24E), as in the second embodiment, the game is won for the probable big hit, and after the big hit game is over, the state is shifted to the probable change state with a drop lottery. Type. However, in the case of the "probable change fall type 2" according to the third embodiment, after shifting to the probable change state with the fall lottery, the loss lottery is lost, and if the big hit cannot be made within 100 revolutions of the electric support guarantee, the fall lottery is won. Until then, the "probable change state" continues. This point is different from the second embodiment. In addition, if the player wins the drop lottery during the probable change state after 100 times of the electric support guarantee, as in the case of the “immediate fall type” in the first embodiment, the player immediately enters the fall state, and the symbol fluctuation display game “normal State ”. On the other hand, when the drop lottery is won during the probable change state in which the electric support is guaranteed, as in the “probable change fall type 1” according to the above-described second embodiment, the state shifts to the time saving state, and the remaining electric support times are consumed. If the jackpot is not won by then, the state with the electric support is terminated and the state shifts from the "time saving state" to the "normal state".

(4-3-6. In the case of ST machine type according to Embodiment 4 (section f in FIG. 24))
In the case of the ST machine type according to the fourth embodiment (FIG. 24 (f)), it is a type that wins a probability change big hit and shifts to a “number cut probability change state (ST)” after the big hit game ends. In the case of the ST machine type according to the fourth embodiment (FIG. 24 (f)), the “probable change state” after the big hit game ends until the number of executions of the special symbol change display game ends a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). , Or until the jackpot is determined (winned) within the predetermined number of times, the probability change state continues. However, if the jackpot has not been won within the predetermined number of times, the probable change state ends and the next game shifts to the “normal state”. The ST machine type according to the fourth embodiment wins a big hit (excluding “small hit” which does not become a trigger for shifting the internal game state) after being shifted to a gaming state in which the jackpot lottery probability is at least a high probability state. If the special symbol change display game is completed a predetermined number of times without performing, the high probability state is ended and the jackpot lottery probability is shifted to a low probability. It is different from the “fall type gaming machine” that falls into a low probability state by a fall lottery as in the forms 1 to 3. The upper limit number of times of the special symbol change display game (the number of times of the special symbol change) in which the high probability state is continued is referred to as “specified ST number”.

  (4-3-7. In the case of "type including plural types of jackpots with electric support" according to the fifth embodiment (sections g to h in FIG. 24))

  Embodiment 5 (sections g to h in FIG. 24) relates to a gaming machine classified as "a type including a plurality of jackpots with electric support" in this specification. Here, as an example, a plurality of types of gaming machines including a "time saving big hit" which is a trigger for shifting to a time saving state are illustrated. In the drawing, a plurality of time saving big hits (hour saving big hits A to C) each having a different number of times (20 times, 30 times, 40 times) of the time saving state are provided as the time saving big hits. In the fifth embodiment, after the end of the big hit game, the time-saving big hit A is a power saving guarantee (number of times of saving time) of 20 rotations, the time saving big hit B is 30 times of the power saving guarantee, and the time saving big hit C is the time-saving big hit of 40 rotations.

  In the case of the fifth embodiment, if the big hit cannot be made within the guaranteed number of times of power support, the time saving state ends ("the state with power support" ends), and the state shifts to the "normal state". Here, in the effect under the effect mode after the big hit game, it is preferable that at least the number of working hours be kept secret. More preferably, the jackpot game modes A to C and the jackpot game effects are the same or similar to each other, and which of the jackpot jackpots is won is kept secret from the player. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of which of the time saving jackpots has been won, that is, the number of electric support guarantees to be given (in this example, the number of time savings). Since the player can be expected to continue, it is possible to excite the player's entertainment interest.

  In the case of the fifth embodiment, one or more types of time saving big hits and one or a plurality of types of probable big hits may be included as the big hit types with electric support. In this case, it is preferable that the guaranteed number of times of the electric support is different between the first big hit with the electric support and the second big hit with the electric support. In addition, the big hit game mode (such as the number of rounds and the opening pattern of the big winning prize mouth) of the time-saving big hit may be the same as the probability variable big hit or may be different and can be set as appropriate.

(4-3-8. In the case of the type including “big hit without electric support” according to the sixth embodiment (section i in FIG. 24))
The sixth embodiment (section i in FIG. 24) relates to a gaming machine classified as "a type including a jackpot without electric support (at least a type including a normal jackpot)" in this specification.

  Regarding Embodiments 1 to 6 described above, any jackpot type may be provided as long as the object of the present invention can be achieved. For example, in the case of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4 (a), the hit types in the case of the special symbol 1 are "15R long open probability variable big hit", "2R short open latent large hit", and "small hit". Yes, the type of hit in the case of special symbol 2 is only “15R long open probability big hit” as shown in FIG. 4 (b), but is not limited to this, and the lottery target of special symbol 1 or 2 One or more types of probable big hits, time saving big hits, normal big hits, or small hits can be provided as the hit type.

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, the effect mode (effect state) will be described. The pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes for effecting the transition of the gaming state, and is configured to be able to move between the effect modes. In the above-mentioned effect mode, specifically, during the stay in the “normal state”, an effect related to the “normal effect mode”, and during the “CZ (CHANCE ZONE)” stay, an effect related thereto "CZ production mode", "probable production mode" that performs a related effect while staying in "probable state", and "probable production mode" that performs production related to this while staying in "probable state" In addition, a plurality of effect modes according to each game state are provided. In addition, while staying in the “probable change state”, a plurality of types of “falling-suggestion effect modes” are provided, which provide an effect of suggesting a fall from a state with a power support (a probable change state or a time saving state). In the “CZ effect mode” or “falling implicit effect mode”, the current jackpot lottery probability state (internal game state) is set to a secret state in the effect, and an effect that excites the player with the expectation of the high probability state is performed. It works as "secret mode".

  The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a function unit (effect state transition control means) that controls transition between a plurality of types of effect modes. The production control unit 24 (CPU 241) designates a specific production control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), specifically, the current game state (including the internal game state) or the game state. And the game state managed by the main control unit 20 based on a “specific effect control command” including information on the game state managed by the main control unit, such as specifying that the game state is to be shifted. It is configured to be able to control the transition between a plurality of effect modes in a form that maintains the character. The “specific effect control command” includes the above “variation pattern designation command”, a “game status designation command” transmitted when there is a change in the game status, and a “game status designation command” for specifying the current game status, Commands, a remaining power support number command, and predetermined commands transmitted during a hit ("big hit start interval command (big hit start command)", "big hit end interval command (big hit end command)"), and the like. The effect control unit 24 has a function unit (effect state management means) that manages an effect mode related to a game state. The production control unit 24 (production state management means) grasps at least the game state (variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode)) managed on the main control unit 20 side by the above-mentioned specific production control command, and performs the main control. The effect mode can be controlled to be shifted while maintaining the consistency with the unit 20 side. The effect control unit 24 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to manage the internal game state and the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) managed by the main control unit 20 by the above-described specific effect control command. Switching timing can be grasped. Although details will be described later, in the case of the present embodiment, in response to the switching of the gaming state, it is possible to show a `` launch guidance notification effect '' that instructs the player whether the player is in a right-handed state or a left-handed state. Has become.

(5-2. Basic production under each production mode)
In each effect mode, in each effect mode, the background as the background of the fluctuating display screen of the decorative symbol is set so that the player can grasp the state of the effect corresponding to the game state. The display is basically controlled to be switched to different background effects. In addition, the background image production is not limited to one that changes in accordance with each production mode.Each production mode can be changed by using a decorative pattern with a different pattern corresponding to each production mode, or by changing sound production or light production. Suggests. For this purpose, not from the viewpoint of the winning expectation, but from the viewpoint of the player falling into an unfavorable gaming state, the "falling suggestion effect mode" for implicitly indicating the falling (FIGS. 34 and 35) ) Is also included.

(5-3. Production mode for providing implicit information that informs the current game state without exception: FIGS. 34 and 35)
In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, a plurality of effect modes related to the gaming state are provided in order to notify the player whether the current gaming state is before or after the falling. It is configured to switch between productions that suggest the production mode.

  In the first embodiment, as the effect mode, the game state is in the high-probability state as an effect mode of an effect that indicates whether or not the current game state managed by the main control unit 20 is in the high-probability state. Three types of effect modes A, B, and C are provided in ascending order of possibility (see FIGS. 34 and 35). In "effect mode A", the possibility that the gaming state is in the high probability state is the lowest, and therefore, even in the high base state with the opening extension function, the possibility of the probable change state or the time saving state is low, and without the opening extension function addition. This is an effect mode in which the possibility of the normal state is higher in the low base state. In "Direction Mode B", the possibility of the game state being in the high probability state is medium, so if the base state has the opening extension function, there is hope about the possibility of the probability change state or the time saving state, and the opening extension function is added. This is an effect mode in which the possibility of being in the normal state even in the low base state without any can be estimated to be medium. In the “producing mode C”, it is most likely that the gaming state is in the high-probability state. Therefore, if the game state is the high base state with the opening extension function, it is confident about the possibility of the probability change state or the time saving state, and the opening extension function is not added. This is an effect mode in which the possibility of the normal state is low even in the low base state.

  In addition, the production mode D, which is an effect of notifying that the hold memory (reserved in-consecutive chan) hitting during the hold is confirmed, and the big hit can be made within 100 fluctuations of the electric support guarantee provided with the opening extension function. An effect mode E for notifying that the character is in a high performance state is provided (see FIGS. 34 and 35).

(5-4. Notice production)
Next, the announcement effect will be described. In the above-described effect mode, the effect control unit 24 controls the content of the effect control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, at least the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern designation command (for example, the winning lottery result, the reach effect, etc.). And a function part (notification effect appearance control means) for controlling the appearance of various announcement effects related to the effect mode and the jackpot lottery result based on the presence / absence and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Regarding the announcement performance appearance control means, in the case of a model with a fall lottery function (a fall type model) as in the first to third embodiments, at least a "variation pattern designation command" and a "fall command" (decorative design designation command) May be included) (for example, winning lottery result information, presence / absence of reach effect, presence / absence of pseudo-run, special stop symbol type information (hit type information), special symbol fluctuation time information, falling lottery result information, etc. ), Various announcement effects can be controlled to appear, and in the case of a model that is not a fall type as in the fourth to sixth embodiments, a “variation pattern designation command” and a “decorative design designation command” are used. , And various announcement effects can be controlled to appear.

  Such a notice effect mode suggests (notices) the reliability or expectation (hereinafter, referred to as “winning expectation”) as to whether or not the winning type has been won, and provides the player with a feeling of winning expectation to the winning type. It works as a "directing effect" to inspire. Typical notice productions include "reach production" and "simulated continuous production". The “pseudo continuous production” refers to an effect mode involving a pseudo continuous variation display state (pseudo variation) of a decorative symbol, and the “pseudo variation” refers to a part or a part of the decorative symbol during the decoration symbol variation display game. The display operation is repeated one or more times such that the whole is temporarily stopped (a fluctuating stop operation that looks as if it were stopped and displayed), and the decoration symbol re-display operation is performed from the temporary stop state. In this way, this means a fluctuating display mode that expresses that the fluctuating display operation of the decorative symbol is performed a plurality of times during one symbol fluctuating display game. This point is different from a “read ahead notice effect (continuous notice effect)” described later, which is developed over a plurality of symbol change display games.

  In the case of performing the pseudo fluctuation, for example, while temporarily forming a provisional reach state (a fluctuation display mode that suggests that there is a possibility of a reach state or pretends to be a reach design), A re-variable display operation is executed after the temporary stop state is reached by a combination of symbols that cause a loss, or a special decorative pattern is replaced with a special decorative pattern (a special decoration that indicates that there is a possibility of pseudo-runs). It is possible to execute the re-variation display operation after the temporary stop state is established by a combination of the symbols including the symbol (pseudo consecutive activation chance symbol). Therefore, in the pseudo continuous production, in addition to the production form that expresses as if the decorative display variable display operation is performed a plurality of times during one design variable display game, the above-described “pseudo continuous firing” is used. By using the “chance design”, it is possible to include an effect mode executed while suggesting the possibility of the pseudo fluctuation to the player.

  In addition, the notice effect indicates that there is a possibility of winning a big hit for an operation-holding ball (undigested operation-holding ball) that has not yet been provided for the execution of the symbol change display game (special symbol change display operation). There is a so-called “read ahead notice effect” that informs of the degree of expectation in advance. Regarding this look-ahead notice effect, first, when an operation-holding ball is generated (when the starting condition is satisfied), the operation-holding ball is used in the execution of the symbol change display game (special symbol change display operation) in the main control unit 20. Before being provided, a "pre-reading hit determination" for determining a jackpot lottery result relating to the operation-holding ball in advance is performed.

  Further, by using the result of the "pre-reading hit determination", in the future, the change pattern of the special symbol (the change pattern at the start of the change) when the operation-holding ball is used for the execution of the symbol change display game is determined in advance. "Pre-reading variation pattern determination" is performed (S319 in FIG. 10 (start-up opening winning random number determination processing)). The variation pattern of the special symbol determined in advance is referred to as a “prefetch variation pattern”. In this pre-reading variation pattern determination, for example, it is determined in advance what kind of reach state will be the reach variation pattern or which will be the normal variation pattern that does not go through the reach state.

  In addition, since the above-mentioned look-ahead change pattern is determined using at least the winning lottery result (in this embodiment, the result of the prior determination of the hit lottery and the symbol lottery), the look-ahead change pattern information is Is not only information about the presence or absence of reach, the type of reach production (the type of reach production according to the expected degree of winning), the presence or absence of pseudo-runs, the number of times, etc. The information also includes information on whether it is a "winning variation pattern" at the time of winning or a "losing variation pattern" at the time of winning. When the information of the prefetch variation pattern is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 performs an effect control process regarding a prefetch notice effect (see S714 in FIG. 18 and the like). In this manner, a series of processes for determining the prefetch variation pattern through the prefetch hit determination is referred to as “prefetch determination”.

  There are the following foreseeing notice productions. Referring to FIG. 5, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments, an operation on the special symbol 1 side is provided on a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (in the drawing, the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol). A reserve display area 76 for displaying the number of reserve balls and a reserve display area 77 for displaying the number of reserve reserve balls on the special symbol 2 side are provided. Reservation ball present: When there is a white operation suspension ball which is a normal color (normal reservation display mode), there is a white circle mark, and there is an operation suspension ball with a color such as blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern, rainbow color, etc. The case (dedicated hold display mode) is indicated by a hatched circle) or turned off (no operation-holding ball: indicated by a broken-line circle in the drawing), and information on the current number of operation-holding balls is displayed. It is being notified.

  The display regarding the presence or absence of the operation-holding ball (hereinafter, referred to as “holding display”) is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and each of the holding display areas 76 and 77 can display a maximum of four holding displays. Has become. Specifically, in each of the hold display areas 76 and 77, the leftmost operation-holding ball is the earliest (i.e., the oldest) operation on the time axis among all the operation-holding balls in the hold display. Displayed as a pending ball. In this embodiment, as shown in the drawing, the holding display sections a1 to d1 (holding icons (icon images)) provided on a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the same number (four) as the maximum holding storage number. The special symbol 1 side) and a2 to d2 (corresponding to the special symbol 2 side) are provided. A pre-reading notice effect can be executed using these hold display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2. For example, normally, the display mode is switched to the operating state (lighting state) by the same number as the number of operation-holding balls existing at the time of the prefetch determination, for example, only three. Therefore, the suspension display section functions as suspension display means for displaying the number of operation suspensions. However, when executing the prefetch notice effect, the hold display mode of the corresponding one of the hold display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined prefetch notice display mode (dedicated hold display mode). This serves as a means for generating a prefetch notice effect.

  When the pre-reading notice appears, among the reserved icons in the reserved display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the reserved icon that is the target of the pre-reading notice changes, for example, from the white of the normal reserved display to the preliminary display. A look-ahead preview effect of a “hold display change system” such as changing to a dedicated hold color such as blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern, or rainbow color is held (for example, a look-ahead preview winning hold in FIG. 6A). . Here, the display of the reserved icons in blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern, and rainbow color means that the winning expectation is higher in the order of the reserved colors, and blue, yellow, and green indicate the winning expectation. Belongs to a low expectation effect (low expectation effect) that is relatively low, and the red, D pattern, and rainbow colors belong to a low expectation effect (high expectation effect) with a relatively high winning expectation, and in particular, the rainbow color Is a premium holding icon that is a jackpot confirmation (probable) display. Which of the reserved colors is changed is determined by lottery based on the contents of the prefetch variation pattern. Specifically, in the case of the "big hit" rather than the "losing", and in the case of the reach type with a relatively high winning expectation, the reserved color with the high winning expectation is selected with a high probability. Has become.

  The existing operation pending balls are sequentially consumed as the symbol variation display game is executed, as shown in (1) to (4) of FIG. At this time, in order to express that one operation-holding ball has been consumed, the display position of the hold display unit corresponding to the existing operation-holding ball is shifted up (shifted sequentially to the left), and the number of displayed balls is reduced. Although the display control is performed, the above-described non-normal hold display mode is continuously displayed while the display position of the hold display is changed during this period (see FIGS. 6A to 6C). In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect (hold change notice) of the above-mentioned hold display change system (winning change system) is a special notice effect in one or more symbol variation display games (a plurality of symbol variation display operations). Can be said to be one mode of “continuous notice production”. In addition, the look-ahead notice effect of the “hold display change system” may occur when an operation-hold ball is generated, and when a winning is performed, the normal hold display mode is changed to a dedicated hold display mode when a shift display is performed. In some cases, the timing at which the hold display is changed can be determined as appropriate. Further, even after the display is changed to the exclusive hold display mode, it can be changed to another exclusive hold display mode. For example, after changing to blue hold at the time of winning, it can be changed to yellow hold at the time of shift display.

  Further, on the left side of the holding display areas 76 and 77, a changing display area 78 for indicating the operation holding ball (hereinafter, referred to as “holding during game execution”) currently provided for the special symbol change display game is provided. ing. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured such that an image in which the icon of the game execution suspension K currently provided for the game appears on the icon of the seat J is displayed. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the oldest icon (icon image) of the hold a1 or a2 displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is replaced with the game execution hold K. The icon is moved over the icon of the seat J in the changing display area 78, and the state is maintained for a predetermined display time. When the hold K during the game is put on the seat J, basically the same display mode as the hold display mode in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is maintained, and the operation according to the present symbol variation display game is performed. The pre-reading advance notice display mode (dedicated hold display mode) for the reserved ball is notified to the player even during the game. As a result, it is possible to incite a sense of expectation of winning to the player. When the hold display is displayed as the game holding K, a hold display mode different from the hold display mode in the hold display areas 76 and 77 can appear. For example, at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game, the display color of the icon changes (for example, a hold with a higher winning expectation degree than the hold display mode displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77). (For example, a character image or an item image that suggests a winning expectation degree, or a pseudo consecutive occurrence (the number of pseudo consecutive runs), or the like). Thereby, the winning expectation degree regarding the present special symbol change display game is more clearly notified.

  Further, in the present embodiment, unlike the above-described pre-reading notice effect of the “suspended display change type”, a “read-out change type” pre-read notice effect that is triggered by the start of the symbol change display game can appear. It has become. For example, as shown in FIG. 6 (2), the look-ahead preview effect of the “change system at the start of change” is to display a preview image (lightning bolt image shown in the drawing) dedicated to the look-ahead on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. Is executed in one or more symbol change display games, and is displayed in a one-shot or continuous manner in a pre-read notice effect of an “image display change system”. In this regard, the look-ahead preview effect of "change at the start of change" is the same as the look-ahead preview effect of "hold display change system", and a special notice effect is displayed over multiple special symbol change display games. It can be said that this is one mode of “announcement effect”. The pre-reading announcement effect of the “image display change system” may be ended in accordance with the end of the pre-reading advance notice of the hold display change system (when the pre-reading advance notice target hold is provided in the symbol variation display game), or FIG. As shown in ()), the pre-reading advance notice target hold may be provided to the symbol variation display game, and may appear alone in the game in which the pre-reading advance notice of the hold display change system has ended.

(5-5. Production means)
The production means according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be any stimulus transmission means that can exert a production effect by appealing to human perception such as sight, hearing, touch, etc., and light generation means such as a decorative lamp 45 or an LED device, A sound generating device such as a speaker 46, an effect display device such as a liquid crystal display device 36, a vibrating device for transmitting vibration to an operator's body, a wind pressure device for applying wind pressure to a player's body, or a visual effect by its operation. Is a representative example.

<6. List of Embodiments: FIG. 24>
Here, returning to FIG. 24, regarding each of the first to sixth embodiments of the present invention, “a transition state of a game state in which a switch from right-handed to left-handed guidance information occurs” and “timing for switching from right-handed to left-handed guidance information” ] Are collectively described in association with the display mode of the guidance notification. The “transition mode of the game state in which the switching from the right-handed guidance to the left-handed guidance notification” is a case where the game state is transitioned from the game state with the state with the electric support to the game state with the state without the electric support. In each of the first to sixth embodiments, the contents already described regarding the transition of the gaming state will be appropriately omitted to avoid redundant description.

(6-1. Game state transition mode in which switching from right-handed to left-handed guidance notification occurs)
(In the case of Embodiment 1: Section a in FIG. 24)
In the immediate-fall type gaming machine according to the first embodiment (section a in FIG. 24), when the big hit game ends, the game shifts to a probable change state (high probability, with electric support). Is performed, and if the player first wins the drop lottery, the gaming state shifts from the probable change state to the normal state (low probability, no electric support) at that time. Therefore, in the first embodiment, at the time of transition from the probable change state to the normal state, a switch from right-handed to left-handed guidance notification occurs.

(In the case of Embodiment 2: Sections b to c in FIG. 24)
In the gaming machine of the "probable falling type 1" according to the second embodiment (sections b to c in FIG. 24), when the big hit game is completed, the game machine shifts to the probable changing state (high probability, with electric support), and during this probable changing state, A lottery and a probable falling lottery are performed. Then, in the symbol variation display operation within the guaranteed support number of guarantees (for example, 100 rotations), if the player first wins the drop lottery, the gaming state shifts from the probable change state to the time saving state (low probability, with electric support) at that time. I do. Also, if neither the jackpot lottery nor the drop lottery is won within 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee number, the probable change state ends at the 101st rotation exceeding the electric support guarantee number and the latent probability state (high probability, (Without power support), and then the latent state continues unless the winning lottery is won. If the winning lottery is won before the jackpot winning, the latent state changes from the latent state to the normal state (low probability). , No electricity support). Therefore, in the second embodiment, when shifting from the probable state to the latent state, or when shifting from the time saving state to the normal state, switching from right-handed to left-handed guidance is performed.

(In the case of Embodiment 3: Sections d to e in FIG. 24)
In the gaming machine of the “probable falling type 2” according to the third embodiment (divisions d to e in FIG. 24), when the big hit game is over, the game machine shifts to the probable changing state (high probability, with electric support), and during this probable changing state, If the lottery and the fall lottery are performed and the fall lottery is first won in the symbol variation display operation within the number of guaranteed electric supports (for example, 100 rotations), the gaming state changes from the probable change state to the time reduction state (low Probability, there is an electric support), but if neither the jackpot lottery nor the drop lottery is won within 100 revolutions of the electric support guarantee, if the election support exceeds the guaranteed number of revolutions, even after the 101st rotation, the probability change state will be Continuing, after the 101st rotation, if the player wins the falling lottery before winning the big hit lottery, the state immediately shifts from the probable change state to the normal state (low probability, no electricity support). Therefore, in the third embodiment, when shifting from the probable state to the normal state or when shifting from the time saving state to the normal state, switching from right-handed to left-handed guidance is performed.

(In the case of Embodiment 4: Section f in FIG. 24)
In the “ST machine type” gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment (section f in FIG. 24), when the big hit game is completed, the game shifts to the probable change state (high probability, with electric support), and thereafter, the probable change state for a predetermined specified number of times Continues, and if there is no big hit, the state changes from the probable state to the normal state (low probability, no power support). Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, when shifting from the probable change state to the normal state or when shifting from the time saving state to the normal state, switching from right-handed to left-handed guidance is performed.

(In the case of Embodiment 5: Sections g to h in FIG. 24)
In the gaming machine of the "type including jackpot with electric support" according to the fifth embodiment (sections g to h in FIG. 24), the game shifts to the time saving state when the jackpot game is completed. Depending on whether or not the game has been won, the game ends in one of the three types of time reductions of 20, 30, and 40. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, when one of the time-saving big hits A to C is won, a switch from right-handed to left-handed guidance notification occurs when shifting from the time-saving state to the normal state.

(In the case of Embodiment 6: Section i in FIG. 24)
In the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment (section i in FIG. 24) that includes the “big hit without electric support (normal big hit)”, when the big hit game ends, the game machine shifts to the normal state (low probability, no electric big hit). Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, in the case of the normal big hit, when the big hit game shifts to the normal state, a switch from the right-handed to the left-handed guidance notification occurs.

(6-2. Display form of guidance notification: FIG. 25)
FIG. 25 shows a display mode of the guidance notification in the first to sixth embodiments.

  Explaining which of right-handed and left-handed is more advantageous to the player will be described. The gaming machines of Embodiments 1 to 6 (sections a to i) are all located on the right side (right downflow path 3c side) in the game board 3. It is assumed that there is a prize device (normal variable prize device 41) that can change the prize rate by the opening extension function. In addition, since the special winning opening 50 belongs to the right descending route 3c side, in any of the gaming machines of the above-mentioned categories a to i, "during big hit game" and "during electric support (during probable change state, during working hours)" In the above, "right-handed" is advantageous. Therefore, a guidance notification image (launch guidance notification effect) as launch guidance information indicating the launch direction of the game ball is displayed in a display mode indicating the right strike direction.

  In the first to sixth embodiments, as the “display mode indicating the right strike direction” of the guidance notification image 373, as shown in FIG. 25A, a plurality of rightward arrow images 374a are arranged in a straight line to the right. The "dynamic display mode" of "right arrow right movement" which sequentially moves at a constant speed or intermittently is used, and a rightward arrow image 374a in the dynamic display mode of "right arrow right movement" is It is displayed in a position that does not interfere with the production. In the case of this embodiment, it is displayed at the upper right corner in the liquid crystal screen. Note that the dashed arrow 375 added in FIG. 25A indicates that the “pointing direction” of the arrow image 374a is different from the “moving direction” of the arrow image 374a (FIG. 25B). For convenience of understanding whether the “moving direction” of the image 374a is right or left, it is added in the drawing and does not show an arrow image displayed on the liquid crystal screen. The rightward arrow image 374a (a plurality of arrow image groups shown) is displayed on the upper right side of the liquid crystal screen in substantially the same size, the same color, or the same system of colors.

  After that, when the state is switched as shown in the column of “transition of game state” in FIG. 24, for example, when the transition from the probable change state to the normal state occurs in the immediately falling type (class a) gaming machine, the electric support is lost. The reason that right-handing is advantageous disappears, and left-handing becomes advantageous. Therefore, a guidance notification image indicating left hitting appears as a guidance notification image indicating the launch direction of the game ball at a predetermined timing shown in the right column of FIG. If the guidance notification image indicating left-handed has already disappeared, the guidance notification image indicating right-handed will appear in a “newly displayed form” after the disappearance period, and In the case where the guidance notification image indicating right-handed operation has been continued until immediately before, the right-handed guidance information image appears as a “switching form” to the left-handed guidance information image. Hereinafter, for the convenience of explanation, without distinction between the "newly displayed form" and the "switching form", when the right-handed guidance information is continued until immediately before the switching, that is, the left-handed guidance information is used. The “switching form” will be described as a representative example.

  In the first to sixth embodiments, as the “display mode indicating the left hitting direction” of the guidance notification image 373, as shown in FIG. 25B, a plurality of leftward pointing arrow images 374b are arranged in a straight line to the right. The "dynamic display mode" of "left arrow right movement" that moves sequentially at a constant speed or intermittently is used, and the left arrow image 374b according to the dynamic display mode of "left arrow right movement" is displayed on the upper right of the liquid crystal screen. It is projected in the corner. 25B, the “pointing direction” of the arrow image 374b is different from the “moving direction” of the arrow image 374b, so that the “moving direction” of the arrow image 374b is different. It is added in the figure for convenience of understanding whether it is right or left, and does not show an arrow image displayed on the liquid crystal screen. The leftward arrow image 374b has the same or substantially the same size as the position on the liquid crystal screen where the rightward arrow image 374a appears (upper right side of the screen), and the same or substantially the same size as the rightward arrow image 374a. It is displayed in the same color, the same system color, or a similar color. “Similar colors” means that a color wheel is, for example, a Munsell color system color wheel, a Chamber of Commerce and Industry Color Coordination Chart (CCIC) color system color wheel, a Japan Color Research Color System (PCCS) color wheel, or a natural color system. (NCS) A color hue circle or an Ostwald hue circle, and is an adjacent color between -15 ° and + 15 ° (having a hue difference of 1).

  In the present embodiment, when switching and displaying the right arrow image 374a from the right arrow image 374a to the left arrow image 374b, the left arrow image 374b is the same or substantially the same as the position on the liquid crystal screen where the right arrow image 374a appeared (the upper part of the screen). (Right side) and the same or substantially the same size, the same color, the same system color, or the similar color as the rightward arrow image 374a. That is, when the launch guidance information is switched from the right-handed guidance information to the left-handed guidance information, the left-pointing arrow image 374b is not displayed as an image that is clearly distinguished from the right-pointing arrow image 374a. An image display effect that does not immediately recognize the change appears, and a situation is created in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the switching of the launch guidance information from "right arrow right movement" to "left arrow right movement". The reason for such an image display effect to appear will be described based on the timing of switching to the left-handed guidance notification.

(6-3. Switching timing to left-handed guidance notification)
As described above, the guidance notification image 373 switches from the right arrow image 374a of “right arrow right” to the left arrow image 374b of “left arrow right” according to the type of gaming machine and the transition state of the gaming machine. If the time point (boundary) at which the switching is performed is observed in detail, the timing at which the switching is performed includes (i) the case where the switching is performed at the end of the symbol change before the gaming state changes, and (ii) the gaming state. There are two types, one that is performed at the beginning of the changed symbol variation. In the case of categories a to i in FIG. 24, switching to left-handed notification is performed at any one of these timings.

(Probable change of category a → Normal case)
Category a of the first embodiment deals with a case in which the player falls into the normal state after winning the falling lottery in the "immediate falling type" in the probable change state in the probability changing state. (Refer to the specific example 1, time t6 shown in FIG. 26). Therefore, in the case of the category a, the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the leftward arrow image 374b of “left arrow rightward movement” at the start timing of the symbol variation display game that has won the falling lottery, that is, at the start of the symbol variation that has fallen.

(Time saving of category b → In the case of normal case, specific example 2A)
The category b in the second embodiment deals with a case in which the player wins the drop lottery within 100 revolutions of the electric support guarantee in the probable change state in the “probable change fall type 1”. In the case of this category b, the time is reduced from the time of the fall (see the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29, time t6), and then the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee (see the specific example 2A, time te shown in FIG. 29). The time-saving state continues until arrives, and from the time-saving state to the normal state at the next symbol change (101st rotation). Therefore, as the switching timing of the guidance notification image 373, it is conceivable to switch the guidance notification image 373 to the leftward arrow image 374b of "left arrow rightward movement" from the start of the next symbol change at the 101st rotation.

  However, considering the case where there is no hold memory provided for the symbol change at the 101st rotation, when the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee ends, the guidance notification image 373 changes to the left arrow image 374b of “left arrow right movement”. Must be switched. Because, in order to make the prize of the 101st turn, the launch had to be started in a state where the hold memory was zero, and at the time of the launch, the launch direction instruction was left "right-handed" This is because, at the time of starting the launch, the player performs the launch in accordance with the guidance information of “right strike”, and is forced to launch in a disadvantageous direction. Therefore, in the case of the category b, the guidance is performed at the timing when the design change at the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee ends, that is, at the end of the design change immediately before the design change at the 101st rotation (the design change at the 100th rotation) at which the electric support disappears. The notification image 373 is switched to the leftward arrow image 374b of "left arrow rightward movement".

(Specific example 2B in the case of probability change of category c → latent probability)
The category c of the second embodiment deals with the case in which the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee arrives without winning the fall lottery within the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee in the probable change state in the “probable change fall type 1”. In the case of the category c, since the electric support is lost after the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee ends (see the specific example 2B shown in FIG. 30, time te), the electric support disappears. A right hand strike is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in the case of the category c, similarly to the case of the category b, in consideration of the case where there is no hold storage for performing the symbol change of the 101st rotation, the timing at which the symbol change of the 100th electrical support guarantee is completed, At the end (or immediately after) of the symbol change at the 100th rotation (immediately after the symbol change), which is the end trigger of the presence of the electric support, the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the leftward arrow image 374b of “left arrow rightward movement”.

(Time saving of division d → In the case of a normal case, specific example 3A: same as specific example 2A)
The category d of the third embodiment deals with a case in which the player wins the drop lottery within 100 revolutions of the electric support guarantee in the probable change state in the “probable change fall type 2” and enters a time-saving state from the time of the fall (specific example 3A). I have. The switching timing in the case of the section d is the same as that of the specific example 2A. That is, also in the case of the section d, similarly to the case of the section b, the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee arrives after the vehicle has fallen to the time saving state (see the specific example 2A, time te shown in FIG. 29), and the 100 rotations Since the time saving state is changed from the time saving state to the normal state after the end of the eye, the guidance notification image 373 is displayed at the timing when the symbol change at the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee ends, that is, at the end of the 100th rotation of the symbol change that triggers the end with the electric support. The display is switched to the leftward arrow image 374b of “left arrow rightward movement”.

(Probable change of category e → In the case of normal case, specific example 3B)
In the category e of the third embodiment, in the “probable falling type 2”, the drop lottery is not won even if the electric support guarantee of 100 rotations during the probable change state is exceeded, and the probable change state continues after that, and 130 rotations The case (specific example 3B) in which the lottery is won in the eye (see time t6 in FIG. 36) is handled. In the case of this category e, the symbol change at the 130th rotation makes the normal state, the electric support is lost, and the right-handed operation is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in the case of the category e, the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the leftward arrow image 374b of “Left arrow rightward movement” at the beginning of the 130th symbol change.

(Probable change of category f → normal case)
The category f of the fourth embodiment deals with the case where the 100th rotation of the ST specified number of times has arrived in the “ST machine type”. In the case of this category f, the state changes from the certain change state to the normal state at the end of the 100th rotation of the specified number of STs. Therefore, at the timing when the symbol change at the 100th rotation is completed, that is, at the end of the symbol change at the 100th rotation which is the end trigger of the presence of the electric support, the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the left arrow image 374b of “left arrow right shift”. Can be

(In case of category g time saving → time saving)
In the “type including a time saving big hit (a type including a plurality of types of time saving big hits each of which gives a different number of electric support guarantee times)” (classification g to h) of the fifth embodiment, after the big hit game ends, the time saving Any one of the three types of time reductions of 20 times, 30 times, and 40 times is given, but if the number of time savings is not notified to the player, that is, the number of times the electric support is guaranteed from the player We deal with concealed cases (electricity guaranteed guaranteed number of times). Among them, the category g is, for example, the number of times the power support is guaranteed 30 times or 40 times, and the case where the boundary value of the time saving length of 20 times is reached but the time saving state is still continued is handled. For example, in a case where “30 time reductions” or “40 time reductions” are given, a “20th rotation of time reduction” or “30th rotation of time reduction” which is a boundary numerical value of the time reduction length that arrives before that is given. is there. In such a case, the boundary numerical value (“20 time reductions”, “20 time reductions”, and “20 time reductions”) of the time reduction length that arrives earlier than the assigned time reduction times (here, 30 time reductions or 40 time reductions) is given. 30 times), at the timing at which the symbol variation of the time saving related to the boundary numerical value ends, the time saving continues without ending, and the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the leftward arrow image 374b of “move left arrow right”. Instead, the rightward arrow image 374a is continuously displayed.

(Time h of category h → In the case of normal case)
The division h of the fifth embodiment is different from the case of the above-described section g in the “type including the time-saving jackpot”, and after the end of the big hit game, the number of times of saving time is 20, 30, and 40 times. The case where any one of the time saving times is given and the maximum boundary value of the time saving times of 20, 30, and 40 times is reached, and the time saving state ends. In this case, when the assigned number of time savings (20 times, 30 times, 40 times) arrives, that is, when the longest boundary numerical value is reached, at the timing when the design change of the time savings related to the longest boundary numerical value ends, At the end of the symbol change of the time savings “20th rotation”, “30th rotation”, and “40th rotation”, the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the leftward arrow image 374b of the left arrow rightward movement.

  As described above, the guidance notification image 373 directly notifies whether or not the electric support has ended. For this reason, for example, in the case of a model such as the “immediate fall type” of the category a in the first embodiment, the launch guidance information is switched at the start of the game that has won the fall lottery (switches from right strike to left strike. ) Is required, and if the switching of the firing guidance information is immediately sensed by the player, it is understood that the player has fallen without waiting for the end of the current symbol variation display game. In such a case, the player stops launching without waiting for the current symbol variation display game to end in order to prevent useless balls, and as a result, there is a concern that the operating rate of the gaming machine may decrease. In addition, when a special notice effect (for example, "treasure box effect" to be described later) is displayed as a notice effect that invites the winning and non-winning of the drop lottery, the player won the fall lottery without seeing the notice effect. This is perceived by the player, ruining the stir-up production. Similarly, in the case of other embodiments, if it is possible to delay the detection of the timing of the end of the electric support, it is possible to increase the operation rate of the gaming machine, and to thoroughly watch the notice effect related to the symbol variation display game Or be able to do so.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when switching and displaying the rightward arrow image 374a from the rightward arrow image 374b, the leftward arrow image 374b is the same as or substantially the same as the position on the liquid crystal screen where the rightward arrow image 374a appeared (screen image). At the top right of the image), and furthermore, the image is displayed in the same or substantially the same size, the same color, the same system color or a similar color as the rightward arrow image 374a, and the "right arrow rightward" to "left arrow rightward" The switching of the launch guidance information to へ creates a situation that is difficult to recognize, and makes it difficult to immediately recognize that the switch to the left-handed guidance information. As a result, it is predicted that the player is late in recognizing that the guidance notification image 373 has switched from the right-handed notification to the left-handed notification, and the recognition of the end of the electric support is likely to be shifted backward.

(In the case of jackpot game of category i → normal case)
It should be noted that the category i in the sixth embodiment deals with “the type including the jackpot without electric support”. In other words, the player wins the regular jackpot without the electric support, and immediately after the game of the jackpot ends, shifts to the normal state without the electric support. Therefore, right-handing is not immediately in an advantageous state immediately after the end of the big hit game, and thus the guidance notification image 373 immediately before the big hit game ends (during the ending effect after the end of the final round game) or at the timing when the big hit game ends (immediately after the end). Is switched to the leftward arrow image 374b of “Move Left Arrow Right”. The end of the jackpot game is notified to the player from the ending effect, so if it does not shift to the power support state after the end of the jackpot game, in particular, there is no need to make it difficult to recognize the switching of the launch guidance information, In order to clearly notify the end of the big hit game, it can be said that it is preferable to display the left-handed guidance notification in an effect mode that the player can immediately recognize. Therefore, in the case of a normal big hit, unlike the first to fifth embodiments, it is preferable to display the left arrow image 374b as an image that is clearly distinguished from the right arrow image 374a. For example, when switching and displaying the right arrow image 374a from the right arrow image 374a to the left arrow image 374b, the right arrow image 374a is displayed at a position different from the position on the liquid crystal screen where the right arrow image 374a appears. At least one of display modes of displaying in a different size and displaying in a special color (for example, a color of a relationship (a complementary color) or a color of a different system that is diametrically opposite in a hue circle). It is preferable to employ

<7. Switching to left-handed guidance notification and treasure chest effect: Fig. 25>
In the first embodiment, when the gaming state on the side of the main control unit 20 is switched from the state with the electric support (probable change state) to the state without the electric support (normal state) (when a win is selected in the fall lottery), a fall command is transmitted. (Step S425 in FIG. 13). When the effect control unit 24 receives this fall command, the gaming state is changed to the state without the electric support in a manner that prioritizes other notice effects such as reach effects or in parallel with or overlaps with these notice effects. "Skeptical production" is generated as an announcement production that suspects that the transition may have been made. Specifically, a “treasure box effect” shown in FIG. 25B is generated as the “skeptical effect”. That is, the liquid crystal screen is changed from the normal screen of FIG. 25A to the treasure box effect screen of FIG. 25B. In this treasure box effect, a treasure box image 371 and a push button image 372 appear on the liquid crystal screen, and within a predetermined operation validity period, the corresponding push button (frame effect button 13) is operated to set a predetermined button operation condition. Is satisfied (for example, pressing the push button for a predetermined time or hitting the predetermined number of times), as a result of the production, the lid of the treasure box (treasure box image 371) on the screen is opened, and a mountain of jewels appears. "Lid opening effect (successful effect)" to notify the continuation of the state with support, or "Lid not opened" to notify the end of the state with power support without opening the treasure chest lid even if the push button is operated This is a “player participation type” effect mode in which an “effect (failure effect)” appears. In addition, even when the button operation is not performed during the predetermined operation validity period, either the continuation or the end of the state with the electric support is notified as the effect result. The “treasure box effect” described above serves as a notice effect that suspects that the gaming state may have shifted to the state without the electric support. Therefore, the effect control unit 24 is not limited to the case where a falling command is received, and the drop lottery. The treasure chest effect (skeptical effect) can also be displayed when a specific fluctuation pattern designating command (for example, a command for specifying a specific reach fluctuation pattern) related to the non-winning is received.

<About distractions>
The real purpose of generating the above “treasure box effect” is when the game state shifts to the state without electric support and the launch guidance information is switched from right strike to left strike, the guidance information is switched. This is because the player's attention is directed to the other from the event of notifying (the display of the guidance notification image 373) so that the player does not realize that the launch guidance information has been switched to the left-handed guidance. In the first embodiment, when the right arrow image 374a is switched from the right arrow image 374a to the left arrow image 374b, an image effect that resembles the left arrow image 374b to the right arrow image 374a is made to appear. Although it is difficult to realize that the user has switched to the guidance notification, the “treasure box effect (skeptical effect)” is repeated to cause the player's attention to deviate from the guidance notification image 373, so that the launch guidance is performed. The fact that the information notification is switched to the left-handed guidance notification is further reduced. Therefore, the "treasure box effect" is a "skeptical effect" that makes the game state scent or doubts that the gaming state has shifted to the state without electric support. (Hereinafter, referred to as "distraction effect") for the purpose of distracting the player's attention.

  Since the "treasure box effect" in the present embodiment is aimed at appearing as this "distraction effect", the effect of distracting the player's attention from the switching event of the launch guidance notification and directing it to the other can be obtained. If this is the case, another effect can be generated instead of the treasure box effect. Even in the case where other effects are generated in place of the treasure chest effect, since the purpose is to distract the player, the player participation type effect such as operating the push button by the player Is preferred. However, it is not always necessary to be a player participation type effect. For example, by utilizing the fact that a person tends to pay attention to a moving object, and by including a movable body effect by a movable body as a part of a treasure chest effect, a distraction effect can be obtained. For example, as a precursor effect before the treasure box is opened, a movable body effect (for example, vibrating the flower-shaped accessory 90 up and down) for operating the flower-shaped accessory 90 in a predetermined operation pattern appears, and thereby the treasure box is displayed. The excitement of whether or not the game will be opened will cause the “treasure chest opening effect” to appear while causing the player to pay attention to the flower-shaped accessory 90. In particular, if the difference in the operation mode of the flower-shaped accessory 90 suggests the degree of expectation of continuation in the state with the electric support, the player will pay attention to the operation of the flower-shaped accessory 90, and a distraction effect It is suitable for obtaining a functional effect.

  Referring to FIG. 25, the timing at which the player participation type effect starts is determined by a game period in which the symbol change display game in which the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the left-handed notification is performed (the symbol change starts and then stops. ) Is the time (starting point) at which the game is started. That is, when the symbol variation display game is started, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), on the one hand, the guidance notification image 373 in the dynamic display mode of “left arrow right movement” is displayed from the beginning of the game period. On the other hand, and on the other hand, the image of “treasure box effect” appears on the liquid crystal screen.

  Since this “treasure box effect” is a player participation type effect in which the player repeatedly hits the push button corresponding to the push button image 372 appearing in the liquid crystal screen, the player's consciousness or attention is increased. In this case, attention is paid to hitting the push button repeatedly and whether or not the treasure chest in the screen is opened. In addition to this, in the guidance notification image 373, the dynamic display mode of “right arrow right movement” in FIG. 25A is changed to the dynamic display mode of “left arrow right movement” in FIG. By the switching, the arrow images are switched from the right arrow image 374a to the left arrow image 374b, but both arrow images 374a and 374b are moving rightward, the moving direction is the same, and the rightward arrow image is further displayed. Since 374a and the left arrow image 374b are common in that they are the same or similar arrow images, the player does not feel much that the guidance direction has been switched.

  That is, this treasure box effect includes two elements. One is that the right arrow image 374a and the left arrow image 374b are similar to each other (the width of change is small), "a static distraction element (strictly, an element that does not distract attention but makes it harder for attention). The other is a "dynamic distraction element" in which a larger change display (treasure box effect or continuous hit effect) is performed at the timing when the arrow image changes. The former is a passive measure that keeps the player from noticing the change as much as possible, and the latter is a positive measure that actively diverts the player's attention from the object (a display that wants to divert the player's attention). It is. Of course, since each of these has a certain effect, it is possible to employ a diverting element for only one or the other, not both.

  Referring to FIG. 25, the guidance notification image 373 corresponds to “static distraction means”, and the treasure box image 371 and the push button image 372 correspond to “dynamic distraction means”. Note that the embodiment is not limited to this, and the reserved displays a1 to a4 and b1 to b4 are used as "static distraction means" and little or no flashy effect display is performed when the color or display form changes. It may not be. Although not shown, for example, a character image that occupies more than half of the display area is displayed as “dynamically distracting means” across the screen and displayed so as to overlap the front side of the hold display, and the character is displayed. The hold display may be changed while the hold display overlaps with the hold display for a moment and cannot be seen. This is not limited to the image display, and a movable accessory provided in the gaming machine may be used as “dynamic distraction means”.

  Here, returning to the embodiment of FIG. 25, when the above two elements (static distraction effect and dynamic distraction effect) are overlapped, that is, the player's consciousness is directed to the push button continuous hit. In the case where the current situation and the situation where it is difficult to recognize the switching of the launch guidance information from “right arrow right movement” to “left arrow right movement” overlap, in the player, the guidance notification image 373 changes from the right strike notification to the left. It is predicted that the point in time at which it is recognized that the notification has been switched to the hit notification will be delayed, and that it will often shift backward within the one game period. This means that in many cases, the player keeps hitting the push button repeatedly until the game decision regarding “treasure box effect” is made, that is, until it becomes clear whether or not the treasure box is opened. Therefore, as a result, since the fun of the treasure chest effect is sufficiently enjoyed by the player, it is significant to provide the treasure box effect, and the gaming machine is enriched. Therefore, it is preferable to use these two together, and if only one of them is used, it is preferable to preferentially adopt a dynamic distraction effect, which is a positive measure.

  As described above, since the gaming machine can make a pre-read determination, if the pre-read determination determines that there is a hold in the hold in which the fall lottery has been won, the skepticism is set before the start of the change of the hold. It is also possible to start a dynamic production. In this case, the treasure chest effect is performed over a plurality of changes, and at first glance, even if it is an effect within one change, the holding is actually performed a plurality of times. The advantage of this is that, instead of returning from right-handed notification to left-handed notification at the same time as the start of the above skeptical production, the skeptic production is not performed (at the time when the change in the hold that has been won in the drop lottery is started or stopped). ), The player is paying attention to the skeptical effect, so it is difficult to notice that the player has changed from right-handed notification to left-handed notification.

  In the case of the first and third embodiments, the end timing of the state with the electric support is not fixed, and in the case of the fifth embodiment, the guaranteed number of electric support is set to be concealed from the player in the production. The treasure chest effect according to the mode is mainly used as an effect for notifying whether or not the state with the electric support is continued. On the other hand, in the case of the second and fourth embodiments, since the end timing of the state with the electric support is fixed, the treasure chest effect according to these embodiments is mainly used as an effect to stimulate a sense of expectation as to whether or not a big hit has been won. (This will be described later).

<Process on Main Control Unit: FIGS. 7 to 14>
Next, a game operation process on the main control unit 20 side of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The process on the main control unit 20 side mainly includes a predetermined main process (main control side main process: FIG. 7) and a timer interrupt process started by a periodic interrupt from the CTC (main control side timer interrupt process: 8).

<8. Main control side main processing: FIG. 7>
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the main processing on the main control unit 20 side. The main processing is started when the power is turned on without operating an initialization switch (RAM clear switch: not shown) as in the case of recovery from a power failure state, and when the initialization switch is turned on. There is a case where the power is turned on by being operated. In any case, when power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a voltage is supplied to each control board by the power supply board 31, and the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) starts the main control-side main processing shown in FIG. .

  In the main processing on the main control side, the CPU 201 first executes necessary initialization processing before starting the game operation (step S011).

  Next, the state (ON, OFF) of the RAM clear signal, which is an output signal of the RAM clear switch input through an input port (not shown), is determined (step 012). Here, the RAM clear signal is a signal for determining whether or not to initialize the entire area of the RAM, and usually has a value corresponding to the ON / OFF state of an initialization switch operated by a pachinko parlor clerk. are doing. Here, assuming that the RAM clear signal is in the ON state, the result of the determination in step S012 is "YES", and the entire area of the RAM is cleared to zero (step S016).

  Next, a "RAM clear display command" for notifying that the RAM area has been cleared to zero is transmitted to each control board as an initialization command (step S017). Then, for example, 30 seconds is stored in the RAM clear notification timer as a time for notifying that the RAM has been cleared (step S018). When the RAM clear is executed, the game state is initialized, the internal game state is set to the normal game state, and the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode)) is set to the normal state. When the effect control unit 24 receives the RAM clear display command, it executes an initialization notification effect for notifying that the RAM has been cleared until the RAM clear notification timer (30 seconds) elapses. As the state production mode, the production mode is set to “normal production mode” corresponding to the normal state.

  Next, the CTC that outputs an interrupt signal for activating the timer interrupt operation is initialized (step S019), and the CPU is set to the interrupt enabled state.

  Thereafter, the interrupt-prohibited state and the interrupt-permitted state are repeated until an interrupt occurs, and various random number updating processes are executed during that time (steps S020 to S022). In the various random number updating process (step S021), various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game are updated. The various random numbers are used, for example, to change the initial value (start value) of a random number related to a jackpot lottery (a special symbol determination random number used for symbol lottery) circulating in a predetermined numerical range by increment processing. Random numbers used to change the initial values of random numbers (initial value random numbers for special symbol determination) and random numbers related to the auxiliary winning lottery (random number for auxiliary hit determination and random numbers for normal symbol determination used for auxiliary winning lottery) The initial value random number for hit determination, the initial value random number for normal symbol determination), the random number for the variation pattern used for selecting the variation pattern, and the like are included.

  As various random number counters used for the symbol lottery, the auxiliary hit lottery, or the variation pattern lottery relating to the big hit lottery, a counter for generating an initial value of a random number counter for a special symbol determination, a random number counter for a special symbol determination, for an auxiliary hit determination A random number counter initial value generation counter, an auxiliary hit determination random number counter, a variation pattern random number counter, and the like are provided. In the various random number updating process in step S021, two initial value generation counters for generating initial values of the above-described special symbol determination random number counter and auxiliary hit determination random number counter, a variation pattern random number counter, and the like are updated. Generate various soft random numbers. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the variation pattern random number counter is 0 to 238, a value is obtained from the count value storage area for generating the value of the variation pattern random number in the RAM 203, and 1 is added to the obtained value. And then store it in the original count value storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 239, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters are similarly updated. The CPU 201 is configured to repeatedly execute various random number update processes except during a timer interrupt process executed intermittently.

  Returning to the determination processing of step S012, and continuing the description, the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal) is OFF at the time of recovery from the power failure state (step S012: YES). Therefore, in such a case, the backup flag value is determined following the determination processing of step S012 (step S013). The backup flag is set to the ON state when the power is turned off (backup flag = 5AH ('** H' means an arbitrary hexadecimal number)), and is turned off (backup flag) in the first timer interrupt processing after the power is restored. The flag is reset to (00H).

  Therefore, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored from the power failure state, the backup flag should be normally ON. However, if the predetermined process is not completed before the power is turned off for some reason, the backup flag is reset (OFF). If the backup flag is in the OFF state (step S013: NO), the process proceeds to step S016 to return the operation of the gaming machine to the initial state.

  On the other hand, if the backup flag is ON (step S013: YES), a checksum calculation for calculating a checksum value is executed. Here, the checksum operation is an 8-bit addition operation for the work area of the RAM 203. When the checksum value is calculated, the calculation result is compared with the stored value of the SUM address in the RAM 203 (step S014). At the SUM address, a checksum value obtained by the same checksum calculation when the power is turned off is stored. Then, the stored operation result is maintained by the backup power supply together with other data of the RAM 203. Therefore, originally, both should match according to the determination in step S014.

  However, if the checksum calculation could not be performed when the power was turned off, or if the checksum calculation could be performed, the data in the work area may have been damaged before the checksum calculation of the main process was performed. In such a case, the result of the determination in step S014 is inconsistent. If data corruption is detected due to a mismatch in the determination result (step S014: NO), the process proceeds to step S016, where a RAM clear process is executed, and the operating state of the gaming machine is returned to the initial state. On the other hand, if the checksum value obtained by the checksum operation matches the stored value of the SUM address (step S014: YES), the stack pointer before the power is turned off is restored based on the backup data, and the processing at the time of power shutoff is performed. A game restoration process required to start a game from the state is performed (step S015).

  When the game restoring process of step S015 is completed, the process proceeds to step S019, in which the CTC is initialized and the CPU is set to the interrupt enabled state. Are repeated, and in the meantime, the above-described various random number update processing is executed (steps S020 to S022).

<9. Main control timer interrupt processing: FIG. 8>
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main control timer interrupt process. The main control-side timer interrupt processing is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular intervals (about 4 ms), and is executed while the main control-side main processing is being executed. In the following, for convenience of explanation, an address value (including data described in the address) when the CPU 201 reads and writes a main memory such as a RAM and a ROM, and result information obtained by arithmetic processing on a program In the case where processing such as reading or taking in a register built into the CPU is referred to as “acquisition”, and the case where the CPU 201 accesses the work area of the RAM and stores predetermined data is referred to as “storage”. There is.

  In FIG. 8, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register in the stack area, and then performs a power supply abnormality check process for monitoring a power supply state from the power supply control board 31 (step S051). In the power supply abnormality check processing, it is mainly monitored whether or not the power supply is normally performed. Here, for example, when an abnormality such as a power failure occurs, a backup process of storing predetermined game information at the time of the power failure in the RAM is performed so that the game can be returned without any trouble when the power is returned.

  Next, a timer management process for managing a timer used for game operation control is performed (step S052). The timer values of various timers (for example, a special symbol accessory operation timer described later) used for controlling the game operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are managed (updated) here.

  Next, an input management process is performed (step S053). In the input management process, information detected by various sensors provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in a winning counter. Here, the information detected by the various sensors is, for example, output from winning detection switches such as an upper starting opening sensor 34a, a lower starting opening sensor 35a, a normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, a big winning opening sensor 52a, and a general winning opening sensor 43a. ON / OFF information (winning detection information) of the switch signal to be executed. As a result, whether or not a game ball has been detected (a winning has occurred) at each winning opening is monitored for each interruption. The "winning counter" is a counter provided for each winning opening and counting the number of winning game balls (the number of winning balls). In the present embodiment, an upper starting opening winning counter for the upper starting opening 34, a lower starting opening winning counter for the lower starting opening 35, a normal symbol starting opening winning counter for the normal symbol starting opening 37, A large winning opening winning counter for the winning opening 50, a general winning opening winning counter for the general winning opening 43, and the like are provided.

  Next, a random number management process in a timer interrupt for periodically updating the random number related to each variable display game is performed (step S054). In this periodic random number updating process, a special symbol determining random number and an auxiliary hit determining random number are updated (+1 is added for each interruption), and a process of changing the start value of the random number counter is performed each time the random number counter makes one round. For example, the value of the special symbol determination random number counter is updated within a predetermined range (+1 is added), and every time the special symbol determination random number counter makes one round, the value of the special symbol determination random number counter initial value generation counter is read out. Then, the value of the generation counter is stored in the special symbol determination random number counter. As a result, the start value of the special symbol determination random number counter is changed according to the value of the generation counter, so that the count value of the special symbol determination random number counter becomes random while the update cycle is constant.

  Next, an error management process for monitoring whether there is an abnormality in the game operation state is performed (step S055). This error management process also functions as an abnormality determination unit that determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, monitors an abnormality in the game operation state, and, when an operation abnormality (error) occurs, the generated error. Perform error processing corresponding to.

  Next, a prize ball management process is performed (step S056). In the prize ball management processing, the data stored in the input management processing is grasped, the prize counter is checked, and when a prize is won, a payout control command for specifying the number of prize balls is issued to a payout control board (payout control board). Controller 29). Upon receiving the payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 to perform a payout operation of the designated number of prize balls. As a result, the number of prize balls corresponding to each prize port (the predetermined prize ball number per prize ball promised for each prize port × the number of prize balls for the value of the prize counter) is paid out. I have.

  Next, a normal symbol management process is performed (step S057). In this ordinary symbol management process, a random hit is performed in the ordinary symbol variation display game, and based on the lottery result, the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol and the stop display mode of the ordinary symbol (normal symbol (normally stopped normally) (Symbol)) is determined, or data of an ordinary symbol that repeats blinking at predetermined time intervals (data for LED blinking display while the ordinary symbol is changing) is generated. Or LED blinking display data during normal symbol stop display). This normal symbol management processing functions as an auxiliary game lottery means and a normal symbol display means (ordinary symbol display control means) for controlling the variable symbol display operation.

  Next, a normal electric accessory management process is performed (step S058). In the ordinary electric accessory management process, an excitation signal for solenoid control for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41a necessary for generating the open electric game is generated based on the result of the lottery of the auxiliary winning in the ordinary symbol management process (step S057). And its data (solenoid control data) are set. Based on the data set here, an excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41a in a solenoid management process described later, whereby the operation of the movable wing piece 47 is controlled.

  Next, a special symbol management process is performed (step S059). This special symbol management process functions as a big hit determination means and a fall determination means, and mainly performs a big hit lottery in the special symbol change display game, and based on the lottery result, the special pattern change pattern (pre-read change pattern, change start (Variation pattern at the time) and a special stop symbol are determined. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a special electric accessory management process is performed (step S060). In this special electric accessory management processing, when the big hit lottery result is “big hit” or “small hit”, setting processing necessary for executing and executing a hit game corresponding to the hit is mainly performed. The details of the special electric auditors product management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, right-handed notification information management processing is performed (step S061). In the right-handed notification information management process, if the game state is a game state in which the high base game state of the “electric support supported state” occurs, or if a hit game is being performed, the right-handed instruction information ( In order to produce a “right-handed notification effect (launch guidance notification effect)” that reports information (instruction information for prompting the winning in the large winning opening 50 and the ordinary symbol starting opening 37) for instructing the aim of the right descending route 3c. Is performed. When the right-handed state is being performed, a “right-handed instruction command” for instructing the start of the launch guidance notification effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and in response to this command, the effect control unit 24 causes the launch control unit 24 to execute the launch guidance. It is configured to control the notification effect. As a result, an appropriate firing position is instructed to the player.

  Also, in the right-handed notification information management process, if the game state is such that a low base game state of “no power support state” occurs, or if it is not in a hit game, it is determined that the left-handed state is being played and a right-handed notification effect is displayed. A process for not giving out or performing the right-handed notification effect that is appearing is stopped. If the player is in the left-handed state, a “left-handed instruction command” for instructing to stop the above-mentioned launch guidance notification effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and in response to this command, the effect control unit 24 transmits the above-mentioned fire guidance notification. It has a configuration that can control the effect.

  On the side of the effect control unit 24, when a right-turn instruction command or a left-turn instruction command is received based on the current effect mode and / or the current gaming state managed by the control unit 24, the right-turn state changes to the left-turn state. Or, the appearance control of the guidance notification image 373 (the right-pointing arrow image 374a or the left-pointing arrow image 374b) is performed according to whether or not it is the timing to switch from the left-handing state to the right-handing state. In the case of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25A, as a right-handed notification effect, the guidance notification image 373 is placed at a position (upper right corner) that does not interfere with the decorative design display area in the liquid crystal screen. It is displayed in a dynamic display mode of “moving right arrow right”. When switching from the right-handed state to the left-handed state, the effect control unit 24 switches the display of the guidance notification image 373 to the dynamic display mode of “left arrow right movement” in FIG. 25B. I have. The switching between the right-pointing arrow image 374a and the left-pointing arrow image 374b does not use the right-handing instruction command or the left-handing instruction command, but is transmitted, for example, during a change pattern designation command, a game state designation command, or a hit. By using predetermined commands (such as a big hit (small hit) start command, a big hit (small hit) end command, etc.), a remaining power support count command, a time saving end command, a fall command, and the like, the game state change timing is grasped. It is good also as composition which can show launch guidance information production according to a game state.

  Next, an LED management process is performed (step S062). In this LED management process, display data is output to the normal symbol display device 39a and the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. Thereby, the fluctuation display and the stop display of the normal symbol and the special symbol are performed. The display data of the normal symbol created in the ordinary symbol management process in step S057 and the special symbol created in the special symbol display data update process (step S309 in FIG. 9 described later) during the special symbol management process in step S059. The display data is output in this LED management process.

  Next, external terminal management processing is performed (step S063). In this external terminal management process, the operating state information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output to an external device such as a hall computer HC or an island lamp through the frame external centralized terminal board 21. The operating state information includes information that a big hit game has occurred (the condition device has been activated), that a small hit game has occurred, that the symbol variation display game has been executed, and that prize information (for example, a starting port and a large prize). Various information such as information indicating that the mouth has won a prize and the number of award balls) and error occurrence information are included.

  Next, a solenoid management process is performed (step S064). In this solenoid management process, an excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c based on the solenoid control data created in the ordinary electric accessory management process in step S058, and the special electric accessory management process is created in step S060. For example, output processing of an excitation signal to the special winning opening solenoids 42c and 52c based on the obtained solenoid control data is performed. Thereby, the movable wing piece 47, the open door 42b, and the open door 52b open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the lower starting port 35 and the special winning opening 50 are opened and closed.

  After the processing of steps S051 to S064 is completed, the contents of the saved register are restored (register restoration processing), and the register is set to the interrupt permission state (step S065). As a result, the timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control-side main process before the interruption, and the main control-side main process is performed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<10. Special symbol management process: Fig. 9>
Next, the special symbol management process (step S059) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol management process in step S059.

  In FIG. 9, the CPU 201 first performs a special figure 1 start port check process on the special symbol 1 side (upper start port 34 side) (step S301), and then performs a special pattern on the special pattern 2 side (lower start port 35 side). A starting port check process is performed (step S302). The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start-up opening check process in steps S301 to S302, the state of the small hit flag is determined (step S303). The "small hitting flag" is a flag for designating whether or not a small hitting game is in progress. When the flag is ON (= 5AH), it indicates that the small hitting game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the small hit game is not being performed.

  If the small hit flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S303: $ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S304). The “condition device operation flag” is a flag for designating whether or not a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5AH), it indicates that a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the big hit is not being played.

  When the condition device operation flag is OFF (= 00H) (step S304: $ 5AH), that is, when neither the small hit game nor the big hit game is performed (step S303: $ 5AH and step S304: $ 5AH), special According to the symbol operation status (00H to 03H), processing related to the special symbol change display operation is performed (step S305: special symbol operation status branching process). On the other hand, if a small hit game is being played (step S303: = 5AH) or a big hit game is being played (step S304: = 5AH), the processing relating to the change display operation of the special symbol in steps S306 to S308 is not performed, and the process is continued. The process proceeds to a special symbol display data update process in step S309. Therefore, when either the small hit game or the big hit game is being performed, the special symbol fluctuating display operation is not performed. State is kept as it is). The “special symbol operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol. This status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

  In the special symbol operation status branching process of step S305, the special symbol operation status is determined depending on which of the status values is “standby (00H, 01H)”, “changing (02H)”, or “confirming (03H)”. , Execute the corresponding processing.

  Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is “standby (00H, 01H)”, the special symbol change start process (step S306) is performed. If the symbol change process (step S307) is “confirming (03H)”, the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308) is executed. Here, the above-mentioned “waiting” indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next fluctuation, and “during fluctuation” indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is fluctuating (variation display). The above "confirming" indicates that the change of the special symbol is finished and the stop (fixed) display is being performed (during the special symbol confirmation time). By these processes, the variable display operation for setting the start and stop of the change of the special symbol is realized. The details of the special symbol change start process (step S306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When any of the above-described steps S306 to S308 is completed, a special symbol display data updating process in step S309 described below is performed. In this special symbol display data update processing, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing. If the special symbol is changing, the data of the special symbol (special symbol) which repeats blinking every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is determined. 7-seg blinking display data during the change) is created, and if the special symbol is not changing, data for stop display (7-seg blink display data during the special symbol stop display) is created. The display data of the special symbol created here is output in the LED management process (step S62) of FIG. 8, and the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. As a result, the process exits the special symbol management process and proceeds to the special electric accessory management process in step S060 in FIG.

(10-1. Starting port check process: FIG. 10)
First, the starting port check process (steps S301 and S302 in FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the details of the special figure 1 starting port check processing in step S301 and the special figure 2 starting port check processing in step S302. This start-up opening check process plays a role as a prize-winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. In the special figure 1 start-up opening check process of step S301, the special symbol variation display game 1 is executed. As the pre-start processing, the addition processing of the number of operation-holding balls on the special figure 1 due to the occurrence of a prize in the upper starting port 34, the processing of storing various random numbers, the processing of generating a prize-winning command, and the processing of generating and transmitting a hold-addition command are performed. In the special figure 2 starting port check processing in step S302, the special figure change display game 2 is executed as a pre-start processing (prize processing on the special figure 2 side) due to the occurrence of a winning in the lower starting port 35. The addition processing of the number of operation reserve balls, the storage processing of various random numbers, and the preparation processing of a reservation addition command on the special figure 2 side are performed. FIG. 10 focuses on the special figure 1 starting port check processing, and the special figure 2 starting port check processing is substantially the same as the special figure 1 starting port check processing. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected at the upper starting port 34 (step S311).

  When the winning of the upper starting port 34 is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of operation-reserved balls of the special symbol 1 is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of operation-holding balls related to the special symbol 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “special figure 1 operation-holding ball”) is less than the maximum number of storages for holding (here, the upper limit is four). If the winning detection of the upper starting port 34 is not detected (step S311: NO), the process exits the special figure 1 starting port check processing without doing anything.

  If the winning of the upper starting port 34 is detected, but the number of special figure 1 operation pending balls is 4 or more (step S312: YES), the process proceeds to step S325 described below, and the number of special figure 1 operation pending balls is not 4 or more. In this case, that is, if it is less than 4 (step S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the special figure 1 operation pending ball number (step S313), and the process proceeds to step S314.

  When the process proceeds to step S314, various random numbers used in the special symbol change display game 1 relating to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the random number for the jackpot determination, the random number for the special symbol determination, the random number for the fluctuation pattern, and the random number for the fall determination are obtained from various random number counters, and the obtained random numbers are stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203. Store. The reserved storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information relating to the symbol variation display game as an operation reserved ball (reserved data). In the reserved storage area, the various random numbers as the reserved data are stored in a special symbol. Until the change display operation 1 is performed (until the special symbol change display game 1 is executed), the start conditions are held and stored in the order of establishment (winning order). The reserved storage area includes a reserved storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 (a special symbol 1 reserved storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 (first reserved storage area)) and a special symbol 2 And a special figure 2 hold storage area (second hold storage area)) corresponding to. These hold storage areas are provided with a hold 1 storage area to a hold n storage area (n is the maximum number of operation-holding balls: n = 4 in the present embodiment), and each of the hold data corresponds to the maximum number of operation-holding balls. Can be stored.

  Among the various random numbers, the special symbol determination random number and the variation pattern random number are extracted from a corresponding random number counter that generates a random number by software. Since the random number values of these random number counters are randomly updated in the interrupt processing that occurs intermittently and in the main processing executed between the interrupt processings in the corresponding count value storage areas, the values are obtained as they are. Is done. On the other hand, the random number value for big hit determination is extracted from a random number generation circuit (big hit determination random number counter: not shown) that generates a random number in hardware. When a detection signal of a game ball is input from the upper starting port sensor 34a or the lower starting port sensor 34a, the random number generation circuit latches the count value at this timing, and the count value is input to the microcomputer. It has become. The CPU 201 stores this count value as a big hit determination random number value in a storage area for the big hit determination random number (a special electric auditors product operation determination random number latch buffer) of the RAM 203 provided separately from the reserved storage area of the RAM 203. Then, at a necessary timing, the big hit determination random number value stored in the special electric auditors product operation determination random number latch buffer is read and used.

  Next, as the winning command data for creating a winning command (data corresponding to the lower byte side (EVENT) of the winning command), read-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: “FFH”) for prohibiting pre-read determination is acquired ( Step S315), it is determined whether or not the “special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition” is satisfied (step S316). The “special figure 1 prefetching prohibition condition” is a condition for prohibiting the prefetching determination for the special figure 1 operation holding ball.

  When the special figure 1 prefetching prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the process proceeds to step S320A without performing the process related to prefetching determination (steps S317 to S319). In this case, by the processing of step S315, the winning command having the prefetching prohibition data (EVENT: “FFH”) designates prohibition of prefetching, and the prefetching determination for the current special figure 1 operation holding ball is prohibited. As a result, the prefetch notice effect is not executed (see step S316: YES processing route). In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is accompanied by the “electric support available state”, the prefetching determination on the special symbol 1 side is prohibited. This is because during the power support state, the lower starting opening 35 wins frequently and the upper starting opening 34 hardly wins, so that it is not necessary to generate a prefetch notice on the special symbol 1 side. This is to reduce the control burden.

  When the special figure 1 prefetching prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), the process proceeds to the process of step S317 after the ground state setting process of step S316A (FIG. 11), and a random number determination process is performed (step S317). This random number determination processing is performed as a part of the “look-ahead determination” processing. In this case, the current operation holding ball (here, in this processing, the special symbol variation display game 1 (the special figure 1) side) 'Pre-reading determination (pre-reading hit determination)' is performed to determine the “winning lottery” in advance.

(Ground state setting process: FIG. 11)
FIG. 11 shows details of the ground state setting process (step S316A in FIG. 10). In this ground state setting process, it is first determined whether or not the current look-ahead ground state flag is in a high probability state (shown as high probability in the figure) (step S351). If it is in the high-probability state (step S351: YES), for the fall determination random number stored as the hold data in the hold storage area or the fall determination random number held in the register, the read-ahead determination of the random number value (type information) is performed. Is performed (step S352), and it is determined whether or not a “fall-down lottery” for shifting the high-probability state to the low-probability state has been won (step S353). If the prefetch determination is made to win this fall lottery (step S353: YES), the prefetch base state flag is set to a low probability state (shown as low probability in the figure) (step S354). Then, the process exits the ground state setting process. If it is determined that the prefetch is not a win in the drop lottery (step S353: NO), the process exits the base state setting process while maintaining the prefetch base state flag in the high probability state. Then, the process proceeds to step S317 in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S351 that the prefetch base state flag is in the low probability state (step S351: NO), the process exits the base state setting process without performing the prefetch determination of the fall determination random number (step S352). Then, the process returns to step S316A in FIG. 10 and proceeds to step S317.

  Therefore, through the base state setting process, the determination of each random number performed in the subsequent steps S317 to S319 (prefetch determination means) is correctly performed based on the gaming state (prediction base state) at the time of winning. That is, when the pre-reading ground state at the time of winning is in the low-probability state, the pre-read determination is performed based on the low-probability lottery data, and in the high-probability state, based on the high-probability lottery data.

  Returning to FIG. 10, when the random number determination processing of step S317 is entered, first, the random number value for jackpot determination stored in the RAM 203 (random number latch buffer for special electric auditors product operation determination) is obtained. (Not shown). Then, based on the acquired random number for hit determination and the hit random number determination table, a hit lottery for the current operation-holding ball (another determination of a big hit, a small hit, and a loss), that is, the current operation-holding ball fluctuates. The lottery result (the result of the random lottery at the start of the change) of the “randomness determination process for special electric auditors product operation determination (see S409 in FIG. 12 described later)” executed when the display operation is performed is determined in advance. Get the result.

(T-1. Hit random number determination table)
The hit random number determination table includes a “special figure change per random number determination table (not shown)” for the special symbol change display game 1 and a “special figure change per random number determination table for the special symbol change display game 2. (Not shown) "in the special figure 1 starting port check process of FIG. 2 is referred to. In the case of the present embodiment, in the random number determination processing in step S317, a common "winning random number determination table" is referred to in the special symbol variation display game 1 and the special symbol variation display game 2.

  In the hit random number determination table of the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number value (the size of the big hit determination random number: 65536) for each big hit lottery probability state (high probability state (high probability), low probability state (low probability)). A determination area (judgment value) for determining a hit (win / fail) type (whether a big hit, a small hit, or a loss) is defined in association with each other. Depending on whether they belong to a value or not, it is determined whether the hit is a big hit, a small hit or a loss. Therefore, even if the acquired jackpot determination random number values belong to the same determination value (when the jackpot determination random number values are the same value), the current jackpot lottery probability state is the high probability state or the low probability state. Depending on the state, the "hit" (hit / fail) type may be different, such as "big hit" on the one hand and "losing" on the other hand. The winning probability of a small hit is a constant winning probability (about 1/200) regardless of the state of the big hitting lottery probability. In this respect, the character differs from the big hit where the winning probability varies depending on the big hit lottery probability state. To

  As a result of the winning lottery (read-ahead winning determination), if a "big hit" is won, "5AH (big hit determination flag is ON)" is acquired as a big hit determination flag, and if it belongs to any other determination value, "5AH" is obtained. 00H (big hit non-winning (big hit determination flag is OFF)) "is obtained. In addition, when "small hit" is won, "5AH (small hit determination flag is ON)" is acquired as a small hit determination flag, and when it belongs to any other determination value, "00H (small hit non-winning) is obtained. (Small hit determination flag is OFF))). Therefore, if the big hit determination random number belongs to the determination value of the big hit determination flag “00H” and the small hit determination “00H”, it means that neither “big hit” nor “small hit” was won. In this case, the result of the hit determination is "losing (the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag are OFF)".

  Here, in the present embodiment, the result of the processing of step S317 is not stored in the RAM 203 while being held in the register provided in the CPU 201, and the process exits this random number determination processing and proceeds to the special stop symbol data generation processing of step S318. Proceed to. The reason is as follows.

  The determination result obtained in the current random number determination process, that is, the data of the winning lottery result in the prefetch determination is immediately used in the subsequent “special stop symbol data creation process”, and thereafter, this data is not required. Therefore, there is no problem if the process exits the random number determination process while the determination result is not stored in the RAM 203 but is retained in the register. This eliminates the need for a program for storing the determination result of the random number determination process (the determination result of the winning determination process in the winning process (the winning result related to the pre-reading determination)), and a dedicated program for storing the determination result. It is not necessary to provide a separate storage area, so that the memory capacity of the ROM and RAM can be reduced, and the control load can be reduced.

  In step S317, the lottery result (the random number determination process in step S409 in FIG. 12) is determined based on the jackpot determination random number (first game information) stored and stored. The preservation memory functions as first prefetch determination means for performing prefetch before performing the special symbol change display operation. Further, the above-described steps S352 to S353 in FIG. 11 are based on the fall determination random number (second game information) stored on hold, and the drop lottery means (fall determination processing in step S408 in FIG. 12: steps S422 to S422 in FIG. 13). It functions as a second look-ahead determination unit that determines whether or not a fall will occur in the fall lottery in S423) before the hold storage is subjected to the special symbol change display operation.

  After the above-described random number determination processing in step S317, the special stop symbol data creation processing is performed (step S318). This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as a part of the 'look-ahead determination' process, and here, 'the look-ahead determination (the look-ahead symbol determination: (Pre-reading determination of the hit (winning) type)) '. The random number determination process (step S317) to the special stop symbol data creation process (step S318) are processes related to "pre-read hit determination" for pre-reading the jackpot lottery result.

  In the special stop symbol data creation process of step S318, first, a winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination process of step S317 is obtained, and a symbol table (to be described later) according to the winning lottery result (big hit, small hit, loss). Big hit symbol table, small hit symbol table, losing symbol table: not shown). Then, the special symbol determination random number value acquired in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the special symbol determination random number value, the symbol lottery for the current operation holding ball, that is, the current operation hold The lottery result (the symbol lottery result at the start of the fluctuation) of the “special stop symbol creation processing (see step S410 in FIG. 12 described later)” executed when the ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation is determined in advance.

(T-2. Design table)
In the symbol table, "a random number for special symbol determination (the size of the random number for special symbol determination: 200)" and a determination area (determination value) for determining a winning type are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number are determined depending on to which of the determination values the special symbol determination random number belongs.

  The "special symbol determination data" is data for identifying a winning type (winning type: big hit type, small hit type, and losing type). In the case of the present embodiment, the 2R short open latent big hit, 15R probability change Big hit, small hit type (if there are multiple small hits, the type (for example, small hit A, small hit B, etc.)), loss type (if there are multiple types of loss, the type (for example, loss A, B)) is data for identifying which of the following has been won. This special symbol determination data is a process that requires winning type information (for example, a game state transition preparation process in step S411 in FIG. 12 described later, a special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S412, and a process related to execution control of a big hit game). This is data used in the special electric accessory management process (step S060 in FIG. 8).

  The “special stop symbol number” is data for designating a special stop symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, and is used when the stop symbol type of the special symbol is specified on the main control unit 20 side. You. In the present embodiment, even in the case of the same 15R probability change jackpot, the display mode of the special stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b depending on the determination value (the display mode of "7 segment" in the present embodiment). May be different.

(T-2-1. Big hit symbol table)
The big hit symbol table of the present embodiment includes a "big hit symbol table 1" for the special figure 1 according to the special symbol variation display game 1 and a "big hit symbol table 2" for the special figure 2 according to the special symbol variation display game 2. The "big hit symbol table 1" is referred to during the special figure 1 starting opening check processing, and the "big hit symbol table 2" is referred to during the special figure 2 starting opening check processing.

  In these jackpot symbol tables, a special symbol determination random value and a determination value for determining a jackpot type are defined in association with each other, and specifically, the special symbol determination random value is set to any determination value. Depending on whether or not it belongs, any one of the plurality of types of jackpots is determined. In the big hit symbol table 1, for example, if the special symbol determination random value belongs to the range of the determination values 0 to 139, a “2R probability changing big hit” is won (symbol selection rate (symbol lottery probability): 140/200). If it belongs to the range of the judgment values 140 to 199, the winning of "15R probable big hit" is won (symbol selection rate: 60/200), the big hit type is determined by the predetermined symbol selection rate, and the special symbol judgment data and special The stop symbol number is determined.

  The big hit symbol table 2 has the same basic configuration as the above big hit symbol table 1, but differs from the big hit symbol table 1 in the following points. The big hit symbol table 2 is different from the big hit symbol table 1 in the specific jackpot symbol selection rate (symbol lottery probability). Specifically, when the special symbol determination random number value belongs to the range of the determination values 0 to 39, “2R probability change big hit” is won (symbol selection rate: 40/200) and belongs to the range of the determination values 40 to 199. In this case, "15R probable big hit" is won (symbol selection rate: 160/200). In other words, the symbol lottery using the big hit symbol table 2 has a higher probability of selecting a type of big hit with a relatively higher profit than the symbol lottery using the big hit symbol table 1, which is a symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player. Thus, it is advantageous for the player to receive the lottery of the special symbol variation display game 2 rather than the special symbol variation display game 1. In particular, in the state with the electric support, the winning probability on the lower starting port 35 side is remarkably improved, and the opportunity to execute the special symbol change display game 2 is also increased. In addition to this, the gaming state is advantageous for the player from the viewpoint of symbol lottery.

  In the process of step S318, various data (symbol lottery result in pre-reading determination: special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number) obtained from the symbol table described above are kept in a register provided in the CPU 201 (for example, special The symbol determination data is not stored in the A register and the special stop symbol number is stored in the RAM 203. The RAM 203 does not store the special stop symbol data creation process, and proceeds to the start opening winning random number determination process in step S319. The reason is as follows.

  In the present embodiment, various data of the determination result (symbol lottery result in the pre-reading determination) obtained in this special stop symbol data creation process is immediately used in the subsequent “starting opening winning random number determination process”. No data is needed. Therefore, there is no particular problem even if the process exits the special stop symbol data creation process while the determination result is not stored in the RAM 203 but is held in the register. This eliminates the need for a program for storing the determination result of the special stop symbol data creation processing in the RAM, and eliminates the need to provide a dedicated storage area for storing the determination result. As a result, the memory capacity can be reduced, and the control load can be reduced.

  When the special stop symbol data creation processing in step S318 described above is completed, then, a random number determination processing for starting opening winning in step S319 is performed. This random number determination process at the time of starting winning a prize is also performed as a part of the “read ahead determination” process, like the random number determination process (step S317) and the special stop symbol data creation process (step S318). 'Pre-reading determination (pre-reading fluctuation pattern determination)' is performed to determine in advance the “fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation” for the operation-holding ball.

  In the above-mentioned starting opening winning random number determination processing, the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination processing in step S317, the 'symbol lottery' result obtained in the special stop symbol data creation processing in step S318, and the processing in step S314. Using the obtained “random number for fluctuation pattern”, the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation relating to the current operation-holding ball, that is, the “special symbol” executed when the current operation-holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation The result (variation pattern content at the start of the variation) of the variation pattern creation process (see S412 in FIG. 12 described later) is pre-read determination. Then, based on the result of the pre-reading determination, a process of creating winning command data used for creating a “winning command” described later is performed. Here, as the winning command data, it is possible to specify at least “MODE_1 (first byte (upper byte))” side command data that can specify at least a winning lottery result (whether a hit or a loss) and the content of a prefetch variation pattern. Command data on the “EVENT (2nd byte (lower byte)) side. Based on the winning command data determined in the starting-port winning random number determination processing, the prefetch variation pattern (excluding the information on the number of reserved balls) is obtained. In the case of the first embodiment, the upper byte is data that can specify information on the winning lottery and the result of the falling lottery (falling lottery result, result of the winning lottery).

  When the start-up winning random number determination processing in step S319 is completed, a "winning-time command" is created based on the command data determined in the startup winning random number determination processing (step S320A). A "hold addition command" for specifying the number of balls to be held is created (step S320). The “hold addition command” is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper byte (MODE) for designating whether the operation pending ball to be prefetched this time is the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side, and a winning prize. And the lower byte (EVENT) for designating the number of operation reserve balls. The hold addition command is used by the effect control unit 24 to notify the information on the current number of active reserve balls to the reserve display areas 76 and 77 when an active reserve ball is generated, or to execute a prefetch notice effect. Is used when presenting a look-ahead notice effect for the notice object hold (a look-ahead notice effect of a change in hold display).

  Next, the created winning command and the hold addition command are transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S321).

  When the prize-winning command and the hold addition command are transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 receiving the command receives a lottery based on information included in these commands and determines whether or not to execute a prefetching advance announcement effect (a prefetching advance announcement lottery). ) Is performed, and when it is determined that the execution is possible based on the result of the lottery (when the pre-reading advance drawing lottery is won), a pre-reading announcement effect for the current operation pending ball is made to appear. In addition, when receiving a winning command and / or a hold addition command, the effect control unit 24 notifies the player that there is a prize in the starting opening regardless of whether or not to display a prefetch notice effect. Can appear.

  In addition, when the number of active balls is 4 or more, even when a new prize is received, a prize-winning command specifying an overflow and a hold addition command (hereinafter, these are abbreviated as “OF commands”) are created. Then, it is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S312: YES → step S320A).

  As described above, the process exits the special figure 1 starting port check processing of step S301, and then performs the special figure 2 starting port check processing of step S302 in FIG.

(10-3. Special symbol change start process: FIG. 12)
Next, the special symbol change start process (step S306) will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol change start process of FIG.

  In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 operation pending balls is zero (step S401). If the number of special figure 2 operation pending balls is not zero (step S401: NO), the CPU 201 proceeds to step S401. Proceeding to the process of S403, the process (Steps S403 to S416) at the start of the variation for the special figure 2 operation-holding ball to be used for the current variation display is performed. On the other hand, if the special figure 2 operation pending ball number is zero (step S401: YES), it is subsequently determined whether the special figure 1 operation pending ball number is zero (step S402), and the special figure 1 operation pending ball is determined. If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the process proceeds to the process of step S403, and the process related to the start of the change of the special symbol for the special figure 1 operation holding ball to be used for the current change display (steps S403 to S403) S416) is performed. By the processing of steps S401 and S402, which of the special figure 1 operation-holding ball and the special figure 2 operation-holding ball is preferentially subjected to the variable display operation (which operation-holding ball is preferentially digested) Is determined. In the present embodiment, when the operation-holding ball exists in both the special figure 1 operation-holding ball and the special figure 2 operation-holding ball, the special figure 2 operation-holding ball is preferentially digested. The special symbol change display game 2 is executed with higher priority than the special symbol change display game 2.

  When both the number of operation-reserved balls in the special figure 2 and the number of operation-reserved balls in the special figure 1 are zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), a state of "no operation-reserved ball" is established. . The state of "no operation holding ball" is a case where the special symbol is on standby and no state of holding is stored, and the effect control unit 24 is notified that the state has entered this state, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The device 36 is controlled to switch to a demo screen display for waiting for a customer. Therefore, when it is determined that "there is no operation pending ball", the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is "standby (00H)" indicating the state of "there is no operation pending ball". (Step S417).

  When the process passes the determination process of step S417, that is, when the state of “no operation pending ball” is reached, and when the special symbol operation status at this time is “standby (01H)” (step S417: NO: The special symbol operation status is switched to "standby (00H)" (see step S472 during processing during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 17A described later) (00H is stored in the special symbol operation status: step S418). Then, a "demo display command" for displaying a demonstration screen is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S419), and the process exits the special symbol change start process. If no effect control command (for example, a prize winning command or a hold addition command) relating to the symbol change display game is received for a predetermined time after receiving the demo display command, the effect control unit 24 performs the variable display operation. Assuming that a state in which the game is not performed for a certain period of time (a customer waiting standby state) has occurred, the liquid crystal display device 36 performs a “demo screen display” for notifying that the player is in a game standby state.

  When the number of operation reserved balls in the special figure 2 is not zero (step S401: NO), or when the number of operation reserved balls in the special figure 2 is zero, but the number of operation reserved balls in the special figure 1 is not zero (step S401: YES → step) (S402: NO), the process (steps S403 to S416) related to the start of the change of the special symbol for the operation-holding ball to be used for the present change display is performed. In addition, regarding the processing of steps S403 to S416 described below, if the determination in step S401 is “NO”, the processing for the special figure 2 operation holding ball is performed, and the processing in step S402 is “ If NO ', the processing is performed for the special figure 1 operation holding ball, but the processing method is substantially the same. Therefore, in order to avoid redundant description, unless there is a special need, a distinction should be made between whether the processing is for the operation-holding ball on the special symbol 1 side or the processing for the operation-holding ball on the special symbol 2 side. I will explain it without.

  When the process proceeds to step S403, the number of operation-reserved balls is subtracted by 1 (the number of operation-reserved balls on the special symbol side used for the current fluctuation display operation-1: step S403), and the information on the number of operation-reserved balls after the subtraction is included. A “hold subtraction command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S404). With this suspension subtraction command, the effect control unit 24 grasps the remaining operation suspension ball count after the current operation suspension ball count digestion.

  Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). The special symbol operation confirmation data is information for designating the special symbol type on the variation start side this time. For example, if the special symbol 1 is the variation start side, “00H” is set, and the special symbol 2 is the variation start side. If there is, "01H" is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

  Next, the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 to S407, the hold data (the random number for the jackpot determination, the random number for the special symbol determination, and the random number for the variation pattern) stored in the hold storage area (hold 1 storage area) corresponding to the hold number n = 1. The random number) is read out, stored in the random number storage area for determination of the RAM 203, and stored in the reserved storage area (reserved 2 storage area, reserved 3 storage area, reserved 4 storage) corresponding to the reserved n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4). The pending data stored in the (area) are stored in the pending storage areas respectively corresponding to 'n-1' (step S406), and the pending 4 storage area is cleared to provide an empty area (step S407). As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game matches the order of the number n of the operation-holding balls (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and the operation-holding ball acquired at the time of winning the starting opening wins any of the holding storages. Whether or not it corresponds to the area is specified, and a new operation-holding ball can be held and stored.

  Then, in the case of the first embodiment, the process proceeds to the fall determination process (step S408) after step S407. However, in the case of the second and third embodiments, as shown by a broken line in FIG. 12, the remaining number of times of the electric support is changed with respect to the number of times the special symbol is guaranteed to be added (the number of times the electric support is guaranteed). It is checked whether or not there is (step S407A), and if there is a remaining electric support count (step S407A: YES), a remaining electric support count command is transmitted (step S407B), and the flow proceeds to the fall determination process of step S408. If there is no remaining power support count (step S407A: NO), the process proceeds to the fall determination process of step S408 without transmitting this command.

(10-3-1. Fall determination process: FIG. 13)
FIG. 13 shows details of the fall determination process in step S408 (FIG. 12). This is a fall determination process that is performed when the special symbol variation display operation starts, that is, at the start of the variation, and is performed prior to the hit determination process (the random number determination process for determining a special electric auditors product operation: step S409). First, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is the probable change state, that is, whether or not a special symbol probable change state flag described later is ON (= 5AH) (step S421). If the special symbol probability change state flag is ON (step S421: = 5AH), the fall determination random number acquired in step S314 (FIG. 10) is determined in the determination table (step S422), and the symbol game starts to change. It is determined whether or not the player has won the falling lottery (step S423).

  If it is determined that the player has won the drop lottery as a determination at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol game (step S423: YES), the special symbol probable change state flag is turned off, and the special symbol time reduction state flag is turned off. The notification LED output number for notifying the status information is set to 00H (OFF) (step S424). When the special symbol probability changing state flag is changed from ON to OFF, the judgment base of the jackpot lottery probability state shifts (falls) from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  Then, the process proceeds to step S425, where a fall command is transmitted for control by the main control unit 20 (step S355). This falling command is transmitted separately according to the state of the electric support (during the electric support), which is in the high base state due to the activation of the release extension function, and other states. Then, the process ends, and the process returns to step S408 in FIG.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol probable change state flag is not set (step S421: $ 5A), the process ends without performing the determination of the random number for fall determination, and the case is that the fall lottery is not won (step S423: NO), the process ends without doing anything, and the process proceeds to step S409 in FIG.

  The case of the “ST machine type” in the fourth embodiment and the “type including a plurality of types of time saving big hits” in the fifth embodiment are non-falling models. Therefore, in the case of Embodiments 4 and 5, this fall determination processing (Step S408) is not performed, and the processing of Steps S407A and S407B is performed. In the case of the fourth embodiment, the probable change state is continued up to the ST specified number of times. Therefore, in step S407A, in order to count the ST period, a special symbol time reduction counter (to be described later, the remaining number of times until the special symbol time reduction state ends) is used. Is determined to be zero or not, and if there is a remaining number of time savings (ST times), a "remaining power support times command" including the remaining times information is sent to the effect control unit 24. Transmit (step S407B). In the case of the fifth embodiment, the time-saving state continues up to the predetermined number of times, so in step S407A, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time-saving number counter is zero, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, and the remaining number of time savings is reduced. If there is, the “remaining power support number command” including the remaining number information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S407B). By this “remaining power support number command”, the effect control unit 24 side can grasp the remaining ST number. Thereby, the information of the remaining ST times is notified by using the effect means, the timing of switching the firing guidance notification (a symbol variation display game in which the ST ends) is grasped, and the firing guidance notification production (here, Then, switching from right-handed to left-handed notification) can appear.

(10-3-2. S407A to S408 in FIG. 12)
Returning to FIG. 12, following step S408, a special electric auditors product operation determination random number determination process is performed (step S409). In the special electric auditors product operation determination random number determination process, a “winning lottery” according to the current special symbol variation display game is performed using the random number value for determining a big hit. The special electric auditors product operation determination random number determination process is similar to the “random number determination process (step S319 in FIG. 10)” which is one of the “prefetch determination” processes in that “winning lottery” is performed. Here, the “winning lottery” in the “judgment at the start of change” for the operation-holding ball used for the current change display operation is performed. The processing procedure of the special electric auditors product operation determination random number determination process is practically the same as the random number determination process (step S319 in FIG. 10), and thus will be appropriately omitted and described to avoid redundant description.

  Here, first, a winning random number determination table corresponding to the current fluctuation display side is obtained based on the special symbol operation confirmation data. This hit random number determination table is the same as the hit random number determination table used in the random number determination process (step S317 in FIG. 10). Next, a big hit judgment random number value stored in the judgment random number storage area is obtained, and a big hit, a small hit, and another winning lottery of a loss are performed based on the big hit judgment random value and the hit random number judgment table. The result is stored in the hit determination flag area of the RAM 203.

  If a "big hit" is won by the winning lottery (a winning lottery at the start of the change), the big hit determination flag is set to "5AH (the big hit determination flag is ON)", and if it belongs to any other determination value. Is "00H (big hit non-winning (big hit determination flag is OFF state)"). When the "small hit" is won, the small hit determination flag is set to "5AH (small hit determination flag is ON)", and when it belongs to any other determination value, "00H (small hit non-winning) (Small hit determination flag is OFF))). Therefore, if the big hit determination random number belongs to the determination value of the big hit determination flag “00H” and the small hit determination “00H”, it means that neither “big hit” nor “small hit” has been won. The result of the hit determination this time is "Loss (the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag are OFF)".

  Here, the reason that the data obtained by the special electric auditors product operation determination random number determination process in step S409 is stored in the RAM 203 is as follows. The data (the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag) obtained in the special electric auditors product operation determination random number determination process is similar to the data obtained in the “random number determination process (step S317 in FIG. 10)” at the time of the prefetch determination. This is because the data is not data that is used immediately in the subsequent processing and becomes unnecessary thereafter, but is data that is needed in the special stop symbol creation processing (step S410) later.

  When the special electric auditors product operation determination random number determination process of step S409 is completed, a special stop symbol creation process is then performed (step S410). In this special stop symbol creation process, the "symbol lottery" according to the present special symbol variation display game is performed by using the winning lottery result of the special electric auditors product operation determination random number determination process of step S409 and the special symbol determination random value. Do. The special stop symbol creation process is a process that performs the same function as the “special stop symbol data process (step S318 in FIG. 10)”, which is one of the “read ahead determination” processes, in that “symbol lottery” is performed. However, here, the “symbol lottery” in the “judgment at the start of the change” is performed for the operation-holding ball used for the current change display operation. The basic processing procedure of the special stop symbol creation processing is the same as that of the special stop symbol data processing (step S318 in FIG. 10).

  Here, first, the special symbol operation confirmation data and the winning lottery results (the above-described big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag) obtained in the special electric auditors product operation determination random number determination process in step S409 are acquired, and based on these, , A big hit symbol table, a small hit symbol table, or a lost symbol table. This symbol table is the same as the symbol table used in the special stop symbol data processing (step S318 in FIG. 10). Next, the special symbol determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the special symbol determination random number value, a “symbol lottery” according to the present special symbol variation display game is performed. And stores the symbol lottery results (special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number) in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 (special symbol determination data storage area, special symbol stop symbol number storage area). As a result, the winning type (winning type) of the current special symbol variation display game is determined.

  Here, the reason why the data obtained by the special stop symbol creation processing in step S410 is stored in the RAM 203 is as follows. The data obtained in the special stop symbol creation processing (special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number) is the same as the data obtained in the “special stop symbol data processing (step S318 in FIG. 10)” at the time of the pre-read determination. This is because it is not data that is used immediately in the processing and becomes unnecessary thereafter, but is data that is necessary in the later special symbol variation pattern creation processing (step S412) and the special electric accessory processing (step S60).

  When the special stop symbol creation process of step S410 is completed, a game state transition preparation process is performed (step S411). In this game state transition preparation processing, setting processing necessary for designating a game state after a hit game is performed as a setting for transitioning the game state. Specifically, it is necessary to specify a game state to be shifted to after the hit game, such as a probable change state, a time saving state, a latent state, a CZ (normal), a CZ (latent), a normal state, etc., according to the big hit type. Various data are stored in a predetermined transition state buffer. The data stored in the transition state buffer is used in a jackpot ending process (step S509) described later.

  Various data to specify the game state include the general electric appliance open extended state flag (flag for specifying the operation state of the open extended function (presence or absence of electric support status)), the normal symbol time reduction state flag (normal symbol time reduction function) Flag for designating the operating state of the symbol), the normal symbol probability changing state flag (flag for designating the operating state of the normal symbol probability changing function (lottery probability state per auxiliary)), the special symbol time reduction flag (for the special symbol time reduction function) A flag for designating the operation state), a special symbol probability changing state flag (a flag for designating the operation state of the special symbol probability changing function (big hit lottery probability state)), a special symbol time reduction counter (operation of the special symbol time reduction function ( Counter for counting the remaining number of times until the special symbol time saving state is completed), Special symbol probability change counter (operation of the special symbol probability change function (high probability state) Counter for counting the number of remaining until the end), and the special symbol variation counter (counter for counting the number of times of the change in the special symbols for updating the variation pattern allocation specified number), and the like. Depending on the setting states of these flags and counters, the operating states of the functions relating to the special symbols and the ordinary symbols are determined, and the gaming state is determined. It should be noted that these flags and counters may be provided with data necessary to realize the models of the first to sixth embodiments.

  When the game state transition preparation processing of step S411 is completed, next, a special symbol variation pattern creation processing is performed (step S412). In this special symbol variation pattern creation process, the symbol lottery result of the special stop symbol creation process (at least the winning lottery result obtained in the special electric auditors product operation determination random number determination process), the variation pattern random number, the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) (current game state), the number of active balls, and the like are used to change the special pattern for the active balls to be used in the current fluctuation display operation, that is, the “variation pattern at the start of fluctuation”. Is determined by lottery. Then, a “variation pattern designation command” capable of specifying the content of the variation pattern is created and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side.

  When the special symbol variation pattern creation processing of step 412 is completed, 5AH (ON state) is stored in a special symbol N varying flag (N = 1, 2) designating that variation display is being performed (step S413). . The "special symbol N changing flag" is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is changing, and when the flag is ON (= 5AH), the special symbol changes. And that the flag is OFF (= 00H), indicating that the special symbol is stopped. In addition, the special symbol 1 changing flag (N = 1) corresponds to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2 changing flag (N = 2) corresponds to the special symbol 2 side.

  Next, based on the symbol lottery result obtained in the special stop symbol creation process of step S410, a decoration symbol designation command is created (step S414), and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). The decorative symbol designation command is composed of two bytes, an upper byte (MODE) for designating a special symbol type on the variable side, and a lower byte (EVENT) for designating a big hit type, a small hit type, and a loss type. Therefore, the decoration symbol designation command includes information on the special symbol type on the changing side and the winning type (symbol lottery result). Specifically, on the upper byte (MODE) side, "B5H" is set when the special symbol on the variable side is the special symbol 1, "B6H" is set when the special symbol 2 is the special symbol, and the lower byte (EVENT) is set. For the side, “01H” is set when the winning type is lost, “02H” is set for the 15R probability variable hit, “03H” is set for the 2R short open latent probability hit, and “03H” is set for the small hit. 04H "is set. In the first to sixth embodiments, data for specifying the winning type is set in the lower byte (EVNET), but may be data for specifying the special stop symbol number or the special symbol determination data. Since the decorative symbol designating command includes information on the winning type, the effect control unit 24 mainly includes a combination of decorative symbols for forming a reach state (a symbol type that constitutes the reach symbol), It is used when a combination of decorative symbols (decorative stop symbols) to be finally stopped and displayed, a notice effect corresponding to the winning type in the symbol variable display game, and the like are determined.

  Then, as the setting process at the time of starting the change, the special symbol operation status is switched to “variing (02H)” (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and the random number storage area for determination is cleared to zero (00H is stored) (step S416). ).

  As described above, after exiting the special symbol change start process, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 9 is performed, and thus the special symbol change display is started.

  In the special symbol change processing (step S307), it is monitored whether or not the special symbol is changing, that is, whether or not the change time of the special symbol has elapsed. As a command, a process of transmitting a "fluctuation stop command" to the effect control unit 24, and a confirmed display time (for example, 500 ms) are stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special symbol operation status is "confirmed (03H)". (A 03H is stored in the special symbol operation status) and the like. The “fluctuation stop command” is a command indicating that the fluctuation of the special symbol has been completed, and the fluctuation control command causes the effect control unit 24 to end the special symbol fluctuation display game after the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed. The end (end) is grasped, and the decoration pattern which is currently being changed and displayed is stopped and displayed. Thus, the decorative symbol variation display game is terminated when the special symbol variation display game is terminated. The “fixed display time” is a time (stop display time) in which the stop display is held when the special symbol change display is completed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In the special symbol confirming time processing (step S308), it is monitored whether or not the above-described confirmed display time has elapsed. The symbol operation status is switched to "standby (01H)" (01H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and if the special symbol variation display game is a big hit, a process required to start a big hit game (big hit symbol stop) When a small hit is made, a process required to start a small hit game (various setting processes when a small hit symbol is stopped) is performed. In the various setting processes when the big hit symbol is stopped, the big hit determination flag, the general electric appliance open state extended status flag, the normal symbol time reduction status flag, the normal symbol probability change flag, the special symbol reduction time status flag, the special symbol probability change status flag, the special symbol reduction time Each of the number counter, the special symbol change number counter, and the special symbol change counter is cleared (00H is stored), and the condition device operation flag is turned ON (5AH is stored). In the various setting processes at the time of stopping the small hit symbol, the small hit determination flag is cleared (00H is stored), and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small hit flag.

  Here, the special symbol time reduction counter (remaining number of times in the special symbol time reduction state), the special symbol probability variation counter (remaining ST frequency), and the special symbol variation frequency counter are monitored. For a counter that is not zero, the counter is decremented by one as a portion of the symbol variation display game.

  If the special symbol time reduction counter after the subtraction is zero, it is determined that the number of times the special symbol time reduction state has ended in the current game has been reached, and the time reduction end setting process is performed. Here, as a setting process at the end of the time saving, clearing each of the general electric appliance open state extended state flag, the ordinary symbol time saving state flag, the ordinary symbol probable change state flag, and the special symbol time saving state flag, and the variation pattern distribution designation A predetermined value (for example, 00H indicating a normal state) is stored in the number (Tcode), and as a staging control command, a "time saving end command" indicating that the special symbol time saving state has ended (state transition information without electric support) is effected. It is transmitted to the control unit 24. As a result, from the next game, the player is placed under the state without power support. Since the above-mentioned time-saving end command is transmitted at the end of the current symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 can recognize before the start of the next game that the current game will be in the “no electricity support state”, Before starting the next game, the effect mode can be switched (switching the background image), and the launch guidance notification effect (here, switching from right-handed to left-handed notification) can be made to appear at an appropriate timing. .

  If the special symbol probability change counter after subtraction is zero, it is determined that the number of times the special symbol probability change state has ended in the current game has been reached, and a setting process at the end of the probability change is performed. Here, as the transition setting processing to the normal gaming state accompanying the end of the latent state or the end of the probable change state, the general electric appliance opening extended state flag, the ordinary symbol time reduction state flag, the ordinary symbol probability change state flag, the special symbol time reduction state flag, Then, each of the special symbol probable change state flags is cleared, and if necessary, a predetermined value (for example, 00H indicating a normal state) is stored in the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode). As a result, the jackpot lottery probability is changed from the high probability state to the low probability state from the next game.

  If the special symbol change frequency counter after the subtraction is zero, it is determined that the number of times the special symbol has changed reaches the specified number of game state shifts, and a game state shift setting process is performed. Here, the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) is updated. For example, when CZ (04H) is completed, it is updated to a fluctuation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) that designates “normal state (00H)”, or during the first half of the ST period (for example, up to 30 times of fluctuation). In the case of dividing into three sections, a second half section (for example, up to 93 times of change) and a last section (for example, up to 100 times of change), when each section is completed, it is determined that the game state transition specified number has been reached. Is updated to the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) for designating the next section. Further, when changing to a new variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), a “game state designation command” including game state transition information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The effect control unit 24 can grasp the transition of the game state by the game state designation command.

<11. Special electric accessory management process: FIG. 14>
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S060) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric auditors product management process in step S060.

  In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the small hit flag (step S501). If the small hit flag is ON (= 5AH) (step S501: = 5AH), a small hit for controlling a series of operations of a special variable winning device (opening / closing control of a large winning opening) relating to the small hit game. The process is performed (step S504), and the process exits from the special electric auditors product management process.

  If the small hit flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S501: $ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S502). When the condition device operation flag is OFF (= 00H) (step S502: $ 5AH), the small hit game is not in progress (step S501: $ 5AH) and the big hit game is not in progress. Exit the special electric auditors management process.

  When the condition device operation flag is ON (= 5AH) (step S502: = 5AH), processing according to the special electric auditors product operation status (00H to 04H) is performed (step S503: special electric auditors status branch processing). . The “special electric accessory operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable winning device 42, 52. This status value is changed in accordance with the processing state, and is stored in the special electric accessory operation status storage area of the RAM 203. Is stored in

  In the special electric auditors product operation status branching process of step S503, a process corresponding to the special electric auditors product operation status value is called and executed. Specifically, when the special electric auditors product operation status is “starting process (00H)”, the big hit start process (step S505) is performed. If the accessory operation start process (step S506) is in operation (02H), the special electric accessory operation process (step S507) is performed. If the continuation determination is in progress (03H), the special electric In the case of the “final processing (04H)”, the jackpot operation continuation determination processing (step S508) calls and executes the big hit end processing (step S509). Through these processes, the operation of the special variable prize device 52 relating to the big hit game is controlled. Here, the above-described “during start processing (00H)” indicates a standby state before the start of the big hit game, and the “during operation start processing (01H)” indicates a standby state before the start of the round game. "In operation (02H)" indicates that the round game is being executed, and "Continuation determination (03H)" indicates that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game. "Big hit end processing (04H)" indicates that the big hit game end processing is in progress. When any of the above steps S505 to S509 is completed, the process exits the special electric accessory management process and proceeds to the right strike notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

  Hereinafter, the big hit game control process (steps S505 to S509) and the small hit game control process (step S504) will be described.

(11-1. Big hit start process)
First, the big hit start process (step S505) will be described.

  At the start of the big hit game, the special electric auditors product operation status is set to the initial status value “start processing (00H)”. Therefore, when a big hit occurs, the big hit start processing is performed first.

  Here, 5AH (ON state) is stored in the accessory continuous operation device operation flag as a setting process at the start of the big hit game required when the big hit game is started, and the special electric auditors operation status is set to “operation start process”. (01H) is stored in the special electric accessory operation status, and 01H is stored in the continuous counter. The above-mentioned "continuous operation device for operating objects" is a flag for designating the operating state of the continuous operation device for the official objects. (The round game can be continued), and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the accessory continuous operating device is not operated (the round game cannot be continued). The "continuous number counter" is a counter for managing the number of consecutive round games executed, and the current number of rounds is stored here. Here, since the continuous number counter is set to “01H”, the current round number indicates the first round.

  Next, a "big hit start setting table (not shown)" is acquired. In the "big hit start setting table", the maximum number of rounds (specified round number data), the round display LED number (specified round number display data), and the start interval time are determined according to the special symbol determination data (big hit type). The main control unit 20 refers to the big hit start setting table and stores each data corresponding to the current big hit type in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203. Note that the “start interval time” is an interval from the time when the special symbol confirmation display time elapses and the big hit is determined to the time when the special variable winning device 52 is activated, in which the opening effect is determined. Time span.

  Next, a "big hit start command" for instructing the start of the opening effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the process goes through the big hit start process and proceeds to the right strike notification information management process of step S061 in FIG. The “big hit start command” is information that can specify the current big hit type and the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit (for example, the current big hit type and the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning (variation pattern distribution designation number ( Tcode) and / or internal game state information), and in addition to the role of instructing the start of the opening effect, the effect control unit 24 side performs a series of hit effects developed during the big hit game (opening corresponding to each big hit type). Direction, round effect, round end effect, ending effect, etc.).

(11-2. Special electric accessory actuation start processing)
Next, the special electric auditors product operation start process (step S506) will be described.

  Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Here, the “interval time before the start of the round game” is set in the special symbol auditors operation timer. As the interval time, in the first round (1R), the “start interval time” set in the big hit start processing in step S505 is monitored. When passing through the step S506), the “interval time before opening (interval time set in the later-described special electric auditors product operation continuation determination process (step S508))” is monitored. Until the special symbol auditors operation timer reaches zero, the process exits the special electric auditors operation start process without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol auditors operation timer is zero, that is, if the pre-opening interval time (the start interval time in the case of the first round (1R)) has elapsed, the “large winning opening opening / closing operation setting process” is performed. In the special winning opening opening / closing operation setting process, an opening / closing operation pattern of the special winning opening 50 according to the special symbol determination data (big hit type) and the current number of rounds is set. Specifically, a special winning opening opening / closing operation time for opening / closing the special winning opening 50 (for example, 29.8 seconds for a long opening pattern and 0.1 seconds for a short opening pattern) is a special symbol combination. The data is stored in the object operation timer, and solenoid control data for controlling the special winning opening solenoid 52c is set. This solenoid control data is changed according to the value of the special symbol accessory operation timer. When the special winning opening opening / closing operation setting process is completed, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “operating (02H)” (02H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), and the special electric accessory management process is exited. Then, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

(11-3. Processing during operation of special electric accessory)
Next, processing during the operation of the special electric auditors product (step S507) will be described.

  Here, first, a special winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process is performed. In the special winning opening maximum winning number confirmation processing, the number of winning balls to the special winning opening 50 is counted, it is checked whether or not the winning number of balls reaches the maximum winning number, and when the maximum winning number is reached, Clears the special symbol action timer. As a result, the timer value set in the special electric auditors product operation start process of step S506 is forcibly set to zero, and the large winning opening 50 being opened is closed when the maximum winning number is reached. I have. When the special winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process is completed, it is determined whether or not the special symbol character operation timer is zero, and until the timer value becomes zero (the special winning opening opening time elapses, Or, until the maximum winning number is reached), the process exits from the special electric auditors operation process without doing anything.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (the maximum number of winnings has been reached or the special winning opening opening operation time has elapsed), the special electric auditors operation status is determined to be the end of the round game. Switching to "Continuation determination (03H)" (stores 03H in the special electric auditors operation status), stores the remaining ball discharge time (for example, 1980 ms) in the special symbol auditors operation timer, and executes the special electric auditors operating process. Then, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

(11-4. Special electric auditors product operation continuation determination processing)
Next, the special electric auditors product operation continuation determination processing (step S508) will be described.

  Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the remaining ball discharging time (1980 ms) after closing the special winning opening is set in the special symbol auditors operation timer here (see step S507), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball discharging time has elapsed. Is determined. Until the special symbol auditors operation timer becomes zero, the process exits the special electric auditors operation continuation determination processing without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol auditors operation timer reaches zero (the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed), the continuous number counter is acquired to determine whether the current round number has reached the specified round number (maximum round number). judge. If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, one is added (+1) to the continuous number counter and the "interval before opening" is stored in the special symbol auditors operation timer as a process for continuing the round game, and the special electric The object operation status is switched to "operation start processing (01H)" (01H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status). This exits the special electric auditors product operation continuation determination process and proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

  When the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds, the “end interval time” is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and then, as various setting processes at the end of the round game, the special electric accessory operation status is set. Switch to “Ending process (04H)” (04H is stored in the special electric auditors product operation status). The above “end interval time” is an interval section from the end of the round game of the last round to the end of the big hit game after the remaining ball discharge time elapses, and the time interval that defines the section in which the ending effect is performed. Refers to the width.

  Then, a "big hit end command" for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the process goes through the special electric auditors product operation continuation determination process and proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 in FIG. . The "big hit end command" includes information on the current big hit type and the game state at the time of winning the big hit, that is, information that can specify the game state after the big hit game is completed. It is also used when deciding the effect mode. In addition, the above-mentioned “information on the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit” may include information on the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) and the internal gaming state. Thereby, when the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning is “CZ”, it is also possible to specify whether the CZ is “CZ (normal)” or “CZ (latent)”, The effect mode after the big hit game can be correctly shifted.

(11-5. Big hit end processing)
Next, the big hit end processing (S509) will be described.

  Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the end interval time is set in the special symbol auditors operation timer here, it is determined whether or not this end interval time has elapsed. Until the special symbol auditors operation timer becomes zero, the process goes through the big hit end processing without doing anything, and proceeds to the right strike notification information management processing of step S061 in FIG.

  When the special symbol auditors operation timer reaches zero (the end interval time has elapsed), each data in the transition state buffer set in the game state transition preparation processing of step S411 during the special symbol change start processing (FIG. 12) is deleted. The game state after the big hit game is set using the game. Thereby, the game state after the big hit game is specified. Next, various types of data (condition device operation flag, accessory continuous operation device operation flag, continuous number counter, maximum number of rounds, round display LED number, various buffers, etc.) used during the big hit game control process are cleared, and special The electric accessory operating status is switched to “starting process (00H)” (00H is stored in the special electric accessory operating status).

  When the big hit end processing is finished, a series of control processing related to the big hit game is ended. After exiting the big hit end processing, the flow proceeds to the right-handed notification information management processing in step S061 in FIG.

(11-6. Small hit processing)
Next, the small hit processing (step S504) will be described.

  In the small hit game, a “round game” like the big hit game is not executed. Therefore, as described above, only the operation mode during the small hit game is “2R system big hit game” (in this embodiment, only “2R latent big hit” is provided, but the non-probable variable “2R non-probable big hit” is provided. Is provided, a process for controlling the opening / closing operation pattern of the special winning opening is performed so as to be substantially the same as the operation mode of (including both).

  When entering the small hitting process, first, the "start interval time" in the small hitting game is set in the special symbol character action timer, and a "small hitting start command" for instructing the start of the opening effect is transmitted to the effect controller 24. . If the start interval has elapsed, then a small hitting game state transition preparation process for designating a game state after the small hitting game, which will be described later, is performed. Solenoid control data for controlling the special winning opening solenoid is set so as to have the same or very similar operation mode. As a result, the special winning opening 50 is opened like a 2R system big hit game, and a pseudo round game during the small hit game is executed. Note that the maximum number of wins to the special winning opening 50 during the small hit game is the same as that of the big hit (for example, 9), and when the maximum winning number is reached, the special winning opening 50 is shifted to a closed state. You. However, since the round game like the big hit game is not executed in the small hit game, when the maximum winning number is reached, the pseudo round game itself is ended.

  When a series of opening and closing operations of the special winning opening 50 are completed, a “small hit end command” for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The “small hit end command” includes information that can specify the current small hit type and the gaming state at the time of the small hit winning, and the effect control unit 24 determines the effect mode after the small hit game. Also used when doing. Therefore, the small hit end command plays a role as a game state designation command for designating a game state, in addition to the role of the ending production start instruction, and has the same effect as the “big hit end command” related to the big hit game. This is a control command.

<12: Processing on production control unit side: FIGS. 15 to 23>
Next, the effect control processing on the effect control unit 24 side of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing on the production control unit 24 side mainly includes a predetermined main processing (production control main processing: FIG. 15) and a timer interrupt processing started by a regular interruption from the CTC (production control timer interrupt processing: 17).

<13. Production control main processing: FIG. 15>
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a main process (produce control-side main process) on the performance control unit side. The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) starts the main process on the effect control side shown in FIG. 15 when the game machine body is externally powered on.

  In the main process on the effect control side, the CPU 241 first performs a necessary initialization process before starting the game operation (step S071). Here, as the initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, movable body starting point return processing, CTC initial setting, timer interrupt permission, initial setting of register values inside the CPU including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

  When the initial setting process of step S071 is completed, the main loop process of steps S073 to S078 is performed at predetermined time intervals as a process for normal operation, and otherwise, the effect soft random number updating process of step S079 is repeatedly performed.

  In the processing of step S072, the CPU 241 refers to the counter value for the main loop update cycle, and determines whether or not the main loop update cycle that is the trigger for executing the main loop processing has arrived (step S072). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that is updated in a main loop update process (step S096 in FIG. 17) during a later-described effect control-side timer interrupt process. In the present embodiment, the main loop processing is performed about every 16 ms. Until the main loop update cycle arrives (step S072: NO), the random numbers for various effect lotteries are updated (step S079: soft random number update process for various effects).

  When the main loop update cycle has come (step S072: YES), the CPU 241 performs a received command analysis process (step S073). In the received command analysis processing, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer, and if the effect control command is stored, the command is read out. I do. The effect control commands include the hold addition command, the hold subtraction command, the variation pattern designation command, the decorative design designation command, the variation stop command, and the like, which have already been described.

  For example, when at least a variation pattern designation command (in this embodiment, a variation pattern designation command and a decorative design designation command) is received and stored in the reception buffer, the information ( One or more types of effect patterns are determined based on the fluctuation pattern information and the winning information (or winning type information). The effect pattern determined here serves as “parts effect” as an element constituting the effect scenario. Next, a time schedule for the timing of the determined effect pattern (parts effect) and the effect time width is determined, and an effect scenario is configured. The effect scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. A variety of effect patterns (parts effects) incorporated in the effect scenario are developed one after another or simultaneously, thereby realizing a "effect scenario" in a broad sense. When the “button announcement effect” is incorporated in the determined effect scenario, a “non-operation effect scenario” in the case where the frame effect button 13 is not operated is constructed as a basic effect scenario. When the frame effect button 13 is operated during the button announcement effect, the non-operation effect scenario needs to be changed to the “operation effect scenario” when the frame effect button 13 is operated. The processing related to such a scenario change is performed in a “scenario update processing” in step S074 described below.

  Upon completion of the received command analysis processing in step S073, a scenario update processing is performed (step S074). In this scenario updating process, the contents of the timer required for executing the effect pattern are updated. A typical example of the timer is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule related to the timing of the effect. For example, during a fluctuation period (decorative symbol fluctuation period) in which a decorative symbol is variably displayed (decorative symbol fluctuation period), which is substantially in the same period as the fluctuation period in which the special symbol is variably displayed (special symbol fluctuation period). On the axis, a time schedule of what effect patterns are to be produced by the effect means with what time span is managed by this timer. Such an effect scenario timer is also used in effect processes related to an LED data update process (step S075) and an effect combination control data update process (step S077) described later. Here, the effect scenario timer is monitored, and when the time of occurrence of one effect arrives, sound data for the speaker 46 and a liquid crystal command for image display control are created and stored in the designated area of the RAM 243. . Note that the LED data for the optical display device is created by an LED data update process (step S075) described later, and the motor control data for the movable object is created by a later-described production role control data update process (step 077). You.

  Next, an LED data update process is performed (step S075). In the LED data update process, LED data for the light display device such as the decorative lamp unit 45 and the LED is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer, and stored in the designated area of the RAM 243. The data created here is used in an effect LED management process (step S095 in FIG. 17) during a timer interrupt process to be described later.

  Next, a sound output process is performed (step S076). In this sound output processing, the sound data created in the scenario updating processing in step S074 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, a sound effect is output from the speaker 46 through the sound control unit (sound source LSI). Thereby, the sound effect according to the effect scenario is realized.

  Next, the processing for updating the special effect object data is performed (step S077). In the production effect control data update process, drive control data for the movable body role motors 61, 61a, 61b, 63, 73a is created based on the production scenario data and the production scenario timer. The data created here is used in the attraction effect operation management process (step S094 in FIG. 17) during the timer interrupt process to be described later.

  Next, noise countermeasure management processing for monitoring malfunction of the sound source LSI and the like is performed (step S078). When the program goes into a runaway state due to a malfunction, the watchdog timer times out, the CPU is automatically reset, and the CPU returns from the runaway state. As a result, the main loop process is completed, and the effect soft random number updating process of step S079 is performed until the next main loop updating cycle arrives.

<14. Command reception interrupt processing: FIG. 16>
Next, the command reception interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process on the effect control side. This command reception interruption process is executed with higher priority than the later-described effect control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) when the effect control command is received from the main control unit 20.

  First, when an interruption based on a strobe signal from the main control unit 20 occurs during execution of the main processing shown in FIG. 15, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) saves the contents of the register to the stack area (step S081). The received effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243 (step S082), and the contents of the saved register are restored (step S083). As a result, the command reception interrupt process ends, and the process returns to the effect control unit main process before the interruption, and the effect control main process is performed until the next interrupt based on the strobe signal occurs. As described above, when various effect control commands sent from the main control unit 20 are received, the command reception interrupt processing is executed, and when the effect control command is received, the command is stored in the command reception buffer. Is done.

<15. Effect control side timer interrupt processing: FIG. 17>
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a description will be given of the timer interrupt processing on the effect control side. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the effect control-side timer interrupt processing. This effect control-side timer interrupt process is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (about 1 ms), and is executed during execution of the effect control-side main process.

  In FIG. 17, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S091), and then performs an effect button input management process (step S092). In this effect button input management process, the presence or absence of an input of an operation (ON operation) detection signal from the frame effect button 13 is monitored. To store. This information is used for the button announcement effect.

  Next, a liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S093). In this liquid crystal command transmission processing, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update processing (step S074) in the production control side main processing of FIG. 15, the liquid crystal command is transmitted to the display control unit (liquid crystal control CPU). Then, the image display control for the liquid crystal display device 36 is executed. Thereby, the image effect according to the effect scenario is realized.

  Next, the control of the production of the special effect is performed (step S094). In the production of the special role product operation management, the movable body role motor 61, 61a, Control signals are output to 61b, 63 and 73a. Thereby, a visual effect by the movable object according to the effect scenario is realized.

  Next, effect LED management is performed (step S095). In the effect LED management, the decoration lamp unit 45 and the LED are turned on and off through the light display control unit based on the LED data created in the LED data update process (step S075). Thereby, the light effect according to the effect scenario is realized.

  Next, a main loop update process for managing a main loop update cycle is performed (step S096). In this main loop update processing, the main loop update cycle counter is updated for each interrupt (main loop update cycle counter + 1). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that circulates through a range (for example, 0 to 31) that is a multiple of 16 by increment processing, for example.

  After finishing the processing of steps S091 to S096, the contents of the saved register are restored (step S097). As a result, the timer interrupt process is terminated, and the process returns to the effect control-side main process before the interruption, and the effect control-side main process is performed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<Contents of Received Command Analysis Process: FIGS. 18 to 23>
FIGS. 18 to 23 show the processing closely related to the present invention among the processing executed in the received command analysis processing (step S073 in FIG. 15). Hereinafter, the case where the “winning command”, the “variation pattern designating command”, the “decorative design designating command”, and the specific command required for the launch guidance notification effect are received (stored) will be described.

<16. Reception process of winning command: FIG. 18>
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a received command analysis process when a winning command is received. The prize-winning command handled here is an effect control command transmitted in step S321 of the start-up opening check process in FIG.

  In FIG. 18, when the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) receives a prize-winning command, it first analyzes the contents of the prize-winning command and acquires prefetch determination result information (step S710). Here, the acquired information is stored in the prefetch information storage area of the RAM 203. In the look-ahead information storage area, the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 A corresponding prefetch information storage area is provided on the side. In addition, these prefetch information storage areas are provided with a reservation 1 prefetch information storage area to a reservation n prefetch information storage area (n = 4 in the present embodiment) corresponding to the number of operation suspension balls, and each of them has a maximum operation suspension. The pre-read determination result information for the number of balls can be stored.

  Although not shown, since the hold addition command transmitted in step S321 (FIG. 10) has already been received and stored, the content of the hold addition command is analyzed to obtain the number-of-balls-to-hold information (step S711). ).

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is a pre-read prohibition period (step 712). In the period in which the prefetching is to be prohibited, the period in which the treasure box effect is generated in the first to third embodiments, and in the fourth embodiment, the remaining number of times in the first half of the ST is less than 4 times, the number of remaining times in the second half of the ST is less than 4, For example, the final remaining count is one. If a prefetch notice effect occurs during a specific effect mode relating to these sections, there is a possibility that the effect of the specific effect mode and the prefetch notice effect may cause mutual inconsistency or discomfort. Therefore, while the game state is staying in these sections, the prefetch notice lottery process is configured to be bypassed, and there is no inconsistency or discomfort between the effect made under the specific effect mode and the prefetch effect notice. To do. That is, if it is the pre-read prohibition period (step S712: YES), the process proceeds to step S719 described below without doing anything.

  If the period is not the prefetch prohibition period (step S712: NO), it is determined whether or not the “continuous notice counter” is zero (step S713). The "continuous notice counter" is a counter for determining a prohibition period for prohibiting the occurrence of a prefetch notice effect repeatedly. More specifically, if the current operation-holding ball is set as a target of execution of the prefetching advance notice effect by the prefetching advance notice lottery in step S714 described below (when the prefetching advance notice lottery is won), the current operation-holding ball is consumed. This is a counter for preventing a newly generated operation-holding ball from being set as an execution target of a prefetching effect until (being provided for a variable display operation). The "continuous notice counter" stores the value of the current number N of operation pending balls or the maximum number of operation suspension storage number (N = 4) for the above-described reason (see step S717 described later). .

  If the continuous notice counter is not zero (step S713: NO), it is determined that the prefetch notice lottery is prohibited, and the process proceeds to step S718 without doing anything.

  When the value of the continuous advance notice counter is zero (step S713: YES), the prefetch advance notice lottery process is performed assuming that the prefetch advance notice lottery is permitted (step S714). In this prefetching effect lottery process, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to perform a prefetching advance notice effect based on the prefetching fluctuation pattern type specified by the winning command as a result of prefetching the fluctuation pattern type to be determined at the start of the fluctuation. Things. The “prize-winning command” in the present embodiment is a form that includes information on each of the prefetch variation pattern type and the special symbol type. Therefore, the information regarding the prefetch variation pattern type among these pieces of information is used as a chance of the prefetch effect lottery. However, in the case where the information on the number of operation pending balls, the prefetch variation pattern type, and the special symbol type is carried in the reservation addition command, the control command including the information on the prefetch variation pattern type in that mode is received. Then, a pre-reading effect lottery is performed.

  Here, there are two types of “read ahead notice effect”. One is a one-time or multiple symbol change display operation in which a pending display change system announcement effect that occurs when a game ball wins in the starting port and a start condition is satisfied (that is, at the time of winning or when the start condition is satisfied). In this embodiment, this is a look-ahead notice effect performed by making the notice effect of the hold display change system continuous, that is, by shifting the display position. The other one is to display a notice effect of a change start change system to be generated when the symbol change display operation of the symbol game is executed (that is, at the start of the change) over a plurality of symbol change display operations. This is a pre-reading notice effect, and in this embodiment, is a continuous notice effect performed by making the notice effect (lightning appearance) of the image display change system continuous. Therefore, as the lottery of the pre-reading advance notice effect, there is a lottery about whether or not to perform a notice effect of the change system at the start of fluctuation, and a lottery about whether to perform the notice effect of the change system at the start of fluctuation. Perform independently. However, when both of them are put together in a form of lottery (a form in which the pre-reading notice effect and the notice effect of the change system at the start of change are executed in relation to one lottery result), when the lottery in the pre-read notice effect is won, You may be comprised so that it may win also in the lottery of the notice effect of a change system at the time of a change start.

  In the prefetching effect lottery process, a prefetching effect is determined by referring to a prefetching effect lottery table (not shown) based on the prefetching variation pattern type specified by the winning command (step S714), and the result of the prefetching effect lottery is determined. Effect information (information on the prefetch effect lottery result) based on the prefetching effect (step S715). This effect information is used when presenting a prefetch notice effect. The effect information set here includes, in addition to (i) information for designating a prefetch notice effect of a change in hold display, for example, information related to hold display (designating a hold display mode using a hold color or an icon image), and ( ii) Information for designating both the above-mentioned (i) advance display effect of the change-on-hold display system and the following (iii) advance notice effect of the change-start-time change system, and (iii) designating the advance notice effect of the change-start-time change system. Information (for example, the type of lightning production (strong lightning production (high expected expectation), medium lightning production (medium expected election), weak lightning production (low expected expectation)), and (iv) pre-reading production lottery The information includes non-winning information (information indicating that a prefetch notice effect of the hold display change system is not executed) and the like.

  In the case of this example, when only the pre-reading notice effect of the hold display change system of (i) is performed, “01H” is set as the pre-read operation status, and both the hold display change system and the change start change system of (ii) are performed. To perform the pre-reading advancement effect of “02H” in the pre-reading operation status, and “03H” to the pre-reading operation status in the case of performing only the pre-fetching advancement effect of the change system at the start of change of (iii). If none of the prefetch notice effects is executed, “00H” is stored in the prefetch operation status in a predetermined area of the RAM 243 (step S715).

  When the prefetch effect lottery process ends, the process advances to step S716 to determine the prefetch determination operation status. When the prefetch operation status is “00H” (step S716: = 00H), the prefetch announcement effect is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S718 without doing anything.

  On the other hand, when the prefetch operation status is other than “00H” (step S716: $ 00H), the current value of the number of reserved balls (1 to 4 or 1 to 8) is stored in the continuous notice counter (step S717). . As a result, the prefetch notice lottery for the new operation pending ball is prohibited for a certain period. Note that this counter value is decremented by one each time the old operation pending ball generated earlier is consumed in the decorative symbol designating command receiving process of FIG. 20 described later.

  As described above, by setting the value of the number of existing balls at the time of winning in the pre-reading effect lottery to the “continuous notice counter” (step S717), during the number of symbol changes corresponding to the value of the number of reserved balls, Even if a new prize ball is generated, the lottery of the prefetch notice effect is prohibited for it (step S713: NO route). For example, when the current number of reserved balls is three, the lottery of the prefetching advance notice effect is prohibited during the three symbol changes corresponding to the number of reserved balls, thereby preventing the occurrence of the prefetch notice effect. The “continuous notice counter” described above can also be used as information related to the pre-read notice winning. In other words, if the “continuous notice counter” is zero, it is determined that the prefetch notice is not being won (prefetch notice not executed), and if the value is other than zero, it is determined that the prefetch notice is being won (prefetch notice executed). it can.

  When proceeding to the process of step S718, a process of setting an effect scenario for the prefetch notice having contents including the results of the prefetch notice lottery process, the prefetch notice operation status setting process, and the setting process of the continuous notice counter is performed (step S718).

  When proceeding to the processing of step S719, a hold addition display processing is performed (step S719). In this hold addition display processing, a liquid crystal control command for performing hold display on the liquid crystal display screen (see FIG. 5) is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit. Here, a liquid crystal control command for designating the operation pending ball number information, a liquid crystal control command for causing a look-ahead notice effect of the reserved display change system, and the like are transmitted. As a result, the number of icon images corresponding to the number of operation-holding balls is lit on the liquid crystal display screen, and the hold display mode (normal hold color (white) or dedicated hold color ( Blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern or iridescent color)) is displayed.

<18. Reception processing of fluctuation pattern designation command: FIG. 19>
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a received command analysis process when a variation pattern designation command is received. This variation pattern designation command is an effect control command transmitted in step S412 of the special symbol variation pattern creation processing of FIG.

  In FIG. 19, when the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) receives the variation pattern designation command, it first analyzes the content of the command (step S <b> 731), obtains the variation pattern information of the special symbol that is the content, and stores the RAM 243. (Step S732). The effect scenario in the symbol variation display game is not yet determined at this point, but is determined when a decorative symbol designation command transmitted following the variation pattern designation command is received. In other words, based on the variation pattern information stored here and the information (special symbol determination data information) included in the decoration symbol designation command, an effect scenario in the symbol variation display game (decorative symbol variation display game) is determined. It has become.

<19. Receiving processing of decorative design specification command: FIG. 20>
FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating a received command analysis process when a decorative symbol designating command is received. This decorative symbol designating command is an effect control command transmitted in step S415 of the special symbol change start process in FIG. Here, based on the fluctuation pattern information obtained by the fluctuation pattern specification command receiving process in FIG. 19 and the information obtained by the decoration design specification command, effects during the pattern fluctuation display game (various preview effects), decoration patterns (A temporary stop symbol, a reach symbol, a stop decoration symbol, etc.) of the pseudo-players, a notice effect with the movable body, and the like are determined, and an effect scenario according to the present variable display game is configured. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 transmits the hold subtraction command, the variation pattern designation command, and the decorative symbol designation command to the effect control unit 24 in this order (step S404 of the special symbol variation start process in FIG. 12). When the effect control unit 24 receives the decorative symbol designating command, the effect control unit 24 performs the decorative symbol designating command receiving process of FIG. 20.

  In FIG. 20, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first analyzes the contents of the decorative symbol designating command, and acquires the contents (step S740).

  Next, a decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process is performed (step S741). In the decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process, based on the fluctuation pattern information obtained in the process of step S732 and the winning type information included in the decorative symbol designation command, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol (decoration) to be finally stopped. The symbol stop symbol combination) is determined by lottery. For example, when the content of the variation pattern is a hit variation pattern of the reach effect designation and the winning type information is a 15R long opening probability big hit, in order to determine the stop display mode of the decorative symbol related to the 15R long opening probability big hit. First, a left symbol is determined by lottery, and then a decorative symbol capable of forming a reach state with the left symbol is determined as a right symbol (reach symbol determination), and based on the determined left symbol and right symbol. , The middle symbol is determined such that the decorative symbol row (big hit symbol) related to the 15R long open-variable big hit is finally stopped. As a result, the combination of the decorative symbols when the present decorative symbol change display game is completed is determined. The determined decorative design data is stored in the decorative design data storage area of the RAM 243 and used.

  Next, a launch guidance information control process is performed (step S742). In this launch guidance information control process, the output start of the right-hand guidance information as to when to display the right-hand guidance information, and how long the right-hand guidance information is continued, that is, the symbol variation display game ends. Or an output ending process as to whether to end after continuing over a plurality of symbol variations. In addition, the output start of the right-handed guidance information as to when to switch the display of the right-handed guidance information to the display of the right-handed guidance information, and how long the left-handed guidance information is continued, that is, in the symbol variation display game. An output end process is performed to determine whether to end the process or to continue the process over a plurality of symbol changes and then to end the process. Although the details will be described later, the switching from the display of the right-handed guidance information to the display of the right-handed guidance information is performed in the first embodiment under the condition that the probable change state in which the right-handed guidance information is displayed is continued. This is performed when a winning lottery is won. However, in other embodiments 1 to 5, etc., the transition from the state with the electric support to the state without the electric support is processed as a condition for switching from right-handed to left-handed is satisfied.

(19-1. Treasure chest production: S743 to S745)
Next, the process proceeds to step S743, and it is determined whether or not the state with power support has ended, and whether or not the probable change state has ended in the first embodiment (step S743). If the state has changed from the probable state to the normal state and switched to the state without the electric support (step S743: YES), the treasure chest effect (real treasure box effect) directly related to the presence or absence of the electric support is performed for a predetermined period, for example, It is set to be generated over a plurality of variable display periods including the fallen variable display game period or the fallen variable display game period (step S744). As a result, the liquid crystal display screen is switched from FIG. 51 (a) to FIG. 51 (b), and the treasure box effect screen is displayed at a predetermined number of times of execution of one variable display game to a plurality of variable display games. Become. When the state with the electric support is continued (step S743: NO), it is determined by lottery whether or not a treasure chest effect (gase treasure box effect) that is not directly related to the presence or absence of the electric support is displayed. . Details of the treasure chest effect in each embodiment will be described later.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S746, and it is determined whether or not the treasure chest effect period (treasure box effect period) set in step S744 or S745 is being executed (step S746). If it is during the treasure chest effect period (step S746: YES), the continuous announcement effect process and the announcement effect lottery process are bypassed to suppress other effects and cause the treasure box effect to appear preferentially, and the process proceeds to step S749. move on. If it is not during the treasure chest effect period (step S746: NO), the process proceeds to step S747 to perform the continuous announcement effect process and the announcement effect lottery process.

(19-2. Continuous notice effect processing: S747)
In step S747, first, it is determined whether or not the prefetch operation status set in step S715 in FIG. 18 is “00H: prefetch notice effect is not executed”. Here, if the prefetching operation status is not “00H: prefetching advance notice effect is not executed”, that is, “01H: execute only prefetching advance notice”, “02H: execute both the prefetching advance notice and the background (lightning) prefetching advancement”, “ 03H: Execute only background (lightning) pre-reading advance notice ”, the continuous advance effect effect processing (step S747) is performed.

  The continuous announcement effect process performed in step S747 is an effect process for causing a continuous announcement effect of “variation at the start of variation” during the present symbol variation display game. In this case, in the case of winning in the prefetch announcement effect of “change at the start of fluctuation” in the prefetch effect lottery process of step S714 (FIG. 18) (the prefetch operation status is “02H” or “003”), the special announcement image ( Lightning effect production data by lightning image (lightning image imitating lightning) is created and stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. Thus, a lightning effect by lightning image display appears on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (see FIG. 6 (2)).

  The continuous announcement effect of the “variation start variation system” is executed until the counter of the “continuous announcement counter” becomes zero, and the value of the “continuous announcement counter” is decremented by one each time the symbol variation display game is performed once. Is done. For example, if the pre-reading preliminary lottery lottery hold is the third hold, the counter value of the continuous advance counter is set to N = 3, and “N = 3”. Until all three reserved memories are exhausted, continuous announcements will be made.

  In addition, the continuous announcement effect processing is performed when the next advance addition counter and the prize-winning command are received next time, unless the continuous announcement counter is zero and the prefetch operation status is "02H". Absent. In other words, as long as the operation-holding ball targeted for the pre-reading notice effect is not digested, the pre-read notice effect for the new operation-pending ball does not occur, and the occurrence of the duplicate pre-read notice effect is prohibited. . As a result, the occurrence of the pre-reading advance notice by the preceding and succeeding operation pending balls is limited, and the player can grasp which of the operation pending balls is the pre-reading advance notice.

(19-3. Notice production lottery process: S748)
In the announcement effect lottery process of step S748, one announcement from among a plurality of announcement effects is performed based on an announcement lottery table (not shown) defined in an announcement effect lottery table designation table (not shown) and the contents of the variation pattern. Select the production by lottery.

  The announcement effect lottery process also includes a transition process of an effect mode in which, when a transition is made (fall) from a probable change state (state with electric support) to a normal state (state without electric support), that fact is notified without that. It is. Regarding the effect mode for notifying the fall without any notice, the establishment of the mode transition trigger for shifting from one effect mode to another effect mode is performed when a jackpot end command is received, a specific SP variation pattern is received, a non-specific SP This may be the case where a transition trigger lottery is won when the fluctuation pattern is received, the case where the number of loss fluctuations is 30 times, or the end of the electric support is received. The details will be described later.

(19-4. Production information setting processing)
When the announcement effect lottery process of step S748 is completed, then, effect information setting process is performed (step S749). In this effect information setting process, the suppression counter is cleared, and effect information relating to the announcement effect determined through steps S743 to S748 is set. Here, effect information (for example, information that can specify the type of the determined notice effect) that is required when the effect scenario is constructed in the effect scenario setting process of step S750 described later is set.

(19-5. Production scenario setting process)
Next, an effect scenario setting process is performed (step S750).

  In the effect scenario setting process of step S750, an effect scenario of an effect to appear in the present decorative design change display game is constructed based on the effect information. In each of the announcement effects, the start timing during the symbol change display game and the period during which the effect appears (effect time width) are determined in advance, and the announcement effect determined through steps S743 to S748 and the current change Based on the content of the pattern (variation time, presence of reach effect, type of reach effect, type of pseudo run, presence of pseudo run, the number of pseudo run if pseudo run, etc.), this decorative symbol change display game The production scenario of various productions to be developed inside is constructed. The effect scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243.

  When the rendering scenario setting process in step S750 is completed, the process exits the decorative symbol designation command receiving process, and thereafter, the decorative symbol variation display game based on the rendering scenario is started.

<20. Launch Guidance Information Control Process: FIGS. 21 to 23>
FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating details of the launch guidance information control process according to the launch guidance notification effect. In this launch guidance information control process (FIG. 21), the start timing of the launch guidance information production has arrived, specifically, a game state command (a specific production including game information necessary for the appearance of the launch guidance information production). It is determined whether or not a control command has been received. If a game state command has been received (step S761: YES), a launch guidance information output start process shown in FIG. 21 is executed (step S762). The “game state command” includes, for example, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a game state designation command, a predetermined command transmitted during a hit (a big hit (small hit) start command, a big hit (small hit) end command, etc.), and the rest. There are power support command, time saving end command, fall command, right-handed command, left-handed command, etc.What kind of command is used to produce the launch guidance notification effect according to the current game state It is possible to appropriately determine whether to realize the launch guidance notification effect according to the type of the gaming machine.

(20-1. Launch guidance information output start process: FIG. 22)
In the launch guidance information output start process (FIG. 22), it is determined whether or not the start timing of the launch guidance notification effect has arrived based on the received game state command (step S771).

  If the received game state command is, for example, a big hit start command, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), the right hit guidance information "→" (arrow) is included to notify right hit by the start of the hit game. The display of the guidance notification image 373, the output of the launch guidance information including the message of "right-stroke" by voice, the direction instruction by the light arrow, and the like (right-strike notification) are started, and the firing guidance information output flag is switched to ON. (Step S772). During the hitting game, since the big winning opening 50 on the right downflow path 3c is opened, it is advantageous for the player to perform a "right strike" aiming at the right downflow path 3c side. . In addition, even if the big hit is won in the state with the electric support and the winning game starts, the advantageous state of "right-handed" does not change. Therefore, if the hit occurs in the state with the electric support, the right Control may be performed so that the notification of the hit guidance information is not newly started (updated).

  Also, the received game state command may be a command including power support start information capable of specifying the start of the power support presence state (for example, a jackpot end command relating to a power support-equipped big hit (probably variable big hit or time saving big hit), a right-hand instruction command) ), The right strike notification is started, and the firing guidance information output flag is switched to ON (step S772). When a command including power support start information that can specify the start of the power support status is transmitted, the gaming state is shifted to the power support status (probable change state or time saving state), and the player It is more advantageous for the player to perform “right-handed” aiming at the downflow path 3c. When the present symbol variation display game has a specific variation pattern (for example, an SP reach variation pattern), a notice effect image in which a notice effect effect is hindered may be generated on the display screen if the guide notice image 373 is overlapped. There is. Therefore, in the case of a specific variation pattern or during a specific notice effect, the launch guidance notification effect may be suppressed (prohibited or interrupted). Thereby, the display of the symbol variation and the announcement effect by the reach variation pattern is prioritized, and the display of the right-handed or left-handed guidance information can be suppressed (prohibited or interrupted).

  In addition, the received gaming state command may include a command (for example, a fall command (transmitted in step S425 of FIG. 13)) including power support start information capable of specifying the start of the power support absence state, a time reduction end command, a left strike If it is an instruction command, the output of left-hand guidance information is started (step S779). When a command including power support start information that can specify the start of the power support-less state is transmitted, the game state is shifted to the power support-less state (latent or normal game state), The possibility of winning the lower starting port 35 on the route 3c is extremely low. For this reason, it is advantageous for the player to perform “left-handed” aiming at the upper starting port 34 in the state without the electric support. In the case of the first embodiment, when the falling command (transmitted in step S425 of FIG. 13) is received, the start of the falling symbol change has already been switched to the time saving state. Output (left-handed notification) is started. However, when the number of electric support guarantees is attached as in the second to third embodiments, when the last symbol change of the number of electric support guarantees arrives, the state shifts from the state with electric support to the state without electric support. Starts the output of the left-handing guidance information at the timing when the end of the symbol change (or immediately after the end: for example, the lapse of the fixed display time) that has received the time-saving end command has arrived. This is because if there is no hold memory, the next symbol change of the last number of guaranteed electric support times may be started in a state where there is no guidance notification.

(20-2. Launch guidance information output end processing: FIG. 23)
Returning to the launch guidance information control process of FIG. 21, if it is determined in step S763 of the process that the launch guidance information output flag is ON (step S763: YES), the launch guidance information output shown in FIG. End processing is performed (step S764).

  In the launch guidance information output end process of FIG. 23, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined launch end information output end time (a launch guidance notification effect end time) has come (step S781). In the case of the right strike notification, for example, a predetermined game period (for example, symbol fluctuation 1) from the time when the state with the electric support (probable change state or the time saving state) ends, or the time when the state is changed from the state with the electric support to the state without the electric support. It is determined that the output end time of the firing guidance information has arrived at a point in time when a predetermined time has elapsed, when a prescribed round game related to a normal jackpot has ended (when a jackpot game has ended), or the like. In the case of the left hit notification, a predetermined game period from the time when the big hit game is started, the time when the state is changed from the state without the electric support to the state with the electric support, and the time when the state is changed from the state without the electric support to the state with the electric support (for example, It is determined that the output end time of the firing guidance information has arrived, for example, at the time when a predetermined time elapses or when a predetermined time elapses. However, the output end time of the firing guidance information can be set arbitrarily, for example, from the time when the firing position advantageous to the player changes or the time when the output starts, to the time when a predetermined game period or a predetermined time has elapsed. The notification may be continued.

  If it is determined that the output end time of the firing guidance information has come (step S781: YES), the firing guidance information output flag is switched to OFF (step S782), and the firing guidance information output end processing ends (step S783). ). Thus, the launch guidance information image 373 is not displayed on the display screen 360 of the liquid crystal display device 36. Therefore, although the firing guidance information notification is interrupted or stopped midway, it continues during the period until the firing guidance information output flag is switched to OFF.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined output end time of the launch guidance information has not come (step S781: NO), the launch guide information output end process ends without doing anything.

<21. Specific Example 1 of First Embodiment: FIGS. 26 to 27>
FIGS. 26 and 27 show the “quick fall type” gaming machine according to the first embodiment (section a in FIG. 24), in which the gaming state falls from the probable change state to the normal state, and as a result, the launch direction guidance information This is a specific example (specific example 1 of the first embodiment) in which the display is switched from “right-handed” to “left-handed” and a treasure chest effect appears at that time.

(21-1. Real treasure chest effect: t6 in FIG. 26, FIG. 27)
Referring to FIG. 26, in the specific example 1 in this section a, the 15R jackpot game is started by winning the 15R probability variable jackpot at the time t1, and the electric support is applied from the time t2 when the 15R jackpot game ends. The symbol variation display operation starts below (probable change state: high probability state, state with power support). During the big hit game and the probable change state, the guidance information image 373 indicating the launch direction of the game ball is displayed in the “display mode indicating the right-hit direction” by the launch guidance information display control of the effect control unit, and the right-hit is performed. The advantage is clearly indicated to the player. In the specific example 1, a plurality of right-pointing arrow images 374a shown in FIG. 25 (a) are arranged in a straight line and a constant speed or intermittent in the right direction. In this dynamic display mode of “moving right arrow right”, a rightward arrow image 374a is displayed in the upper right corner of the liquid crystal screen. The broken arrow 375 is added in the drawing to indicate that the “moving direction” of the arrow image 374a is the right direction, and does not indicate the arrow image displayed on the liquid crystal screen.

  While the rightward arrow image 374a is being displayed on the liquid crystal screen in the dynamic display mode, the probable change state (high probability, with power support) continues. Then, at time t6 in FIG. 26, the player wins the fall lottery (fall win), shifts from the probable change state to the normal state (low probability, no electricity support), and changes from the "electric support presence state" to the "electric support absence state". Move to Since the gaming machines handled here have a configuration in which “left-handed” is advantageous to the player when there is no power support, guidance for the launch direction is “right-handed” according to the rules for gaming machines. "" To "left-handed".

  Therefore, on the liquid crystal screen, the launch direction indicated by the launch announcement guidance image 373 from the point in time when the symbol change display operation is started based on winning in the fall lottery (fall win) is shown in FIG. Is switched as shown in FIG. In this example, the direction of the arrow image switches from right to left. In other words, a dynamic display mode in which a plurality of leftward arrow images 374b are arranged in a straight line and sequentially move rightward at a constant speed or intermittently. In this case, the point to be noted is that only the direction indicated by the arrow image 374 switches from right to left, and the direction in which a plurality of leftward arrow images 374b are arranged in a straight line and moves at a constant speed or intermittently is still " Right direction "and does not change. The rightward arrow image 374a is displayed at the upper right corner in the liquid crystal screen in the dynamic display mode of “left arrow rightward movement”.

  On the other hand, from the point in time when the symbol change display operation is started based on winning (fall winning) in the drop lottery, as shown in the section from time t6 to t7 in FIG. 26, under the control of the effect control unit. "Treasure box production" is a reminder effect that indicates that there is a possibility of transition to the state without electric support (in the example of FIG. 26, there is a possibility of falling down), that is, a skeptical effect that doubts that it has fallen without electric support. appear. When the treasure box image 371 in the screen is opened by repeatedly hitting the frame effect button 13 corresponding to the push button image 372 shown in FIG. 25B, the state with the electric support (the probable change state in the example of FIG. 26) continues.

  FIG. 27 shows the relationship between symbol variation (symbol variation display operation), notification of launch guidance information, and a notice effect, based on a time transition centered on time t6 in FIG. The symbol change before the fall winning is “N−0”, the symbol change after the fall winning is “N + 1”, and the subsequent symbol change is “N + 2”, “N + 3”... It is assumed that the shortest variation pattern among all the variation patterns (for example, a normal variation pattern in which the variation time is 1 second).

  As shown in the column of “symbol variation”, FIG. 27 shows a case where a command of a normal variation pattern (treasure box effect failure) is transmitted at time t6. The period of the symbol variation N + 1 starting from the time t6 is a period in which the symbol variation display game of one unit continues, but in the case of the immediate falling type of the first embodiment, the symbol variation display game is already in the normal state at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display game. Has fallen. Further, as shown in the column of “launch guidance information notification” in FIG. 27, at time t6, the guidance notification image 373 switches from the dynamic display mode of “right arrow right movement” to the dynamic display mode of “left arrow right movement”. However, in the case of the first embodiment, since the internal game state immediately falls to the normal game state by winning in the drop lottery in the case of the first embodiment, the timing is the same as the start of the symbol variation display game that has won the fall lottery. Therefore, in the case of the specific example 1 (section a in FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, on the other hand, the launch guidance information is switched from “right arrow right movement” to “left arrow right movement” simultaneously with the start of the symbol change N + 1. On the other hand, as can be seen from the relationship between “symbol variation” and “announcement effect” in FIG. 27, at time t6, a normal variation pattern (for example, a variation time of 2 seconds) is transmitted with respect to symbol variation N + 1. A treasure chest effect appears as an effect (skeptical effect), and this treasure box effect continues during the period of the symbol change from N + 1 to N + 2.

  Therefore, the guidance notification image 373 in the dynamic display mode of “left arrow right movement” in FIG. 25B appears from the beginning of the game fluctuation display game in the symbol variation display game that has fallen to the state without the electric support, and this is played. 25B. At the same time, the “treasure box effect” shown in FIG. 25B occurs, and the player repeatedly hits the frame effect button 13 as a push button corresponding to the push button image 372. Therefore, the player's attention is paid to whether the push button is repeatedly pressed and whether or not the treasure chest in the screen is opened (a distraction effect acts). In addition, the guidance notification image 373 displayed at that time has a dynamic display mode of “left arrow right movement” in FIG. 25B, and the left arrow image is the “left arrow right movement” in FIG. 25A. It moves in the same direction as in the dynamic display mode of “moving right arrow right”. Due to the synergistic action of these two actions, it is predicted that the time at which the player will recognize that the guidance notification image 373 has switched from the right-handed notification to the left-handed notification will be shifted halfway during the game period of the N + 1 change. Is done. In other words, until the game result of `` treasure chest effect '' comes out, that is, until the decision of whether or not the treasure chest is opened, the player keeps hitting the push button repeatedly, and often appreciates the treasure chest effect, As a result, the player can fully enjoy the fun of the treasure chest effect. Therefore, it is too early for the player to recognize that the guidance notification image 373 has been switched from the right-handed notification to the left-handed notification, and the player stops and the operating rate of the gaming machine decreases, It is possible to prevent a situation where the significance of providing the treasure box effect is lost.

(21-2. Gase treasure chest effect: t4 in FIG. 26)
In FIG. 26, during a probable change state before a falling prize, a fluctuation pattern specifying command relating to a specific reach fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern specifying command relating to appearance of a successful treasure chest effect) is transmitted at time t4, and There is a possibility that a treasure chest effect of a gasse which has nothing to do with it (a treasure chest effect to notify the continuation of the probable change state) may occur. In the treasure chest effect of this gaseous box, a screen in which the treasure box opens during or at the end of the reach effect period appears, and the notification result by the treasure box effect is “Treasure box effect succeeded: electricity support continued”. Except for this point, the rest is the same as the failed treasure chest effect described at time t6 in FIG. The existence of this treasure chest production (treasure chest production of success) in addition to the real treasure chest production (treasure chest production of failure) makes the real treasure chest production (treasure chest production of failure) a treasure chest production of a gasse (treasure chest of success) It is difficult to distinguish the effect from the effect on the treasure chest, and the interest in the game increases. In addition, by causing the real treasure chest effect and the gaseous treasure box effect to appear at an appropriate frequency, the player has more opportunities to pay attention to the treasure box effect, and it is recognized that the guidance notification image 373 has been switched in the player. The time can be delayed.

<22. Specific Example 2A of Second Embodiment: FIGS. 28 to 29>
FIG. 29 shows a treasure chest effect as a skeptical effect that doubts the continuation of the electric support state in the case of the category b in the “probable falling type 1” gaming machine in which the electric support does not exist after 100 electric rotation guarantees. This is a specific example (specific example 2A in the section b) taking the case as an example.

(22-1. Launch direction guidance notification and treasure chest effect: te in FIG. 29)
In the specific example 2A of the second embodiment, the player falls down at time t6 and shifts from the probable change state to the time saving state within 100 times of the electric support guarantee. The state with the support is continued until the symbol change at the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee. However, when the symbol changes at the 101st rotation, there is no electric support, and the left-handed state is more advantageous for the player. Therefore, in FIG. 29, at or immediately before the timing te at which the symbol change of the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee ends, the guidance notification image 373 is switched from the right notification to the left notification.

  However, the switching of the guidance notification image 373 is only performed by switching from the rightward arrow image 374a of “right arrow rightward movement” to the leftward arrow image 374b of “left arrow rightward movement”. That is, the difference between the arrow image 374a and the arrow image 374b is only that the direction of the arrow image is switched from right to left, and the direction in which the guidance notification image 373 moves as a whole is changed before and after the switch. Absent.

  At the same time as the switching of the guidance notification image 373, the treasure box image 371 shown in FIG. 25B appears on the liquid crystal screen, and the player participation type treasure box effect is started. You'll be hitting the push button repeatedly to open the treasure chest, and your attention will be directed to it. As a result, it is late to notice that the guidance notification image 373 has changed from right-handed notification to left-handed notification, and the time when the player stops launching is not from the beginning of the symbol variation, but rather from the start of the symbol variation. It slips into the middle and to the end. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to enjoy the treasure chest effect.

(22-2. Gase treasure box effect: t4 in FIG. 29)
In FIG. 29, during the probable change state before the falling prize, the command of the SP reach fluctuation pattern (successful treasure box effect) is transmitted at time t4, and this is related to the treasure box effect of the gasket, that is, the falling to the state without electric support. There is a production without the effect (always with the electric support). Therefore, as the gaseous treasure box effect can occur, as in the case of FIG. 26, it is distinguished between a real treasure box effect (failure treasure box effect) and a gaseous treasure box effect (treasure box effect success). It becomes difficult, and the tension for the treasure chest effect increases, and the interest in the game increases.

  In the second embodiment, when the number of electric support guarantees ends and the state of no electric support is reached, switching to the left-handed guidance notification is performed. Alternatively, the skepticism associated with the left-handed guidance notification can be configured to appear over one or more symbol variations from the symbol variation, or over a plurality of symbol variations before and after including the symbol variation. . However, in the case of the second embodiment, since the end timing of the state with the electric support is fixed (100 times of the electric support guarantee), the symbol is changed one or more times in the symbol change in the state without the electric support or from the symbol change. If only skepticism is to appear over the variation, or over multiple symbol variations before and after including the symbol variation, it will simply inform the end of the state with the electric support. I will. Therefore, the treasure chest effect according to the second embodiment does not notify whether or not the state with the electric support continues as in the first embodiment and the like. It is preferable to use it as a notice effect (expected feeling effect) indicating the expected degree of winning. Specifically, in the state with the electric support, as a treasure chest effect having a character different from that of the first embodiment, in the case of a specific loss variation pattern (for example, an SP reach variation pattern), “Gase treasure chest effect (failure) Treasure chest effect: Loss) ", and in the case of a hit fluctuation pattern, a" real treasure chest effect (successful treasure box effect: big hit) "is caused to appear. In this way, if a real treasure chest effect and a gaseous treasure box effect are mixed and made to appear at an appropriate frequency, it is easier to play a game than to simply bring out a treasure chest effect with a pattern fluctuation around the specified number of STs. The player is more likely to pay attention to a treasure chest effect that indicates a feeling of winning expectation, and the player can delay the time when the guidance notification image 373 is switched, thereby effectively obtaining the distraction effect. be able to.

<23. Specific Example 2B of Second Embodiment: FIG. 30>
FIG. 30 shows a treasure chest effect as a skeptical effect that doubts the continuation of the power support state in the case of the category c in the “probable falling type 1” gaming machine in which the power support is lost after 100 rotations. This is a specific example of the case (specific example 2B in section c).

(23-1. Launch direction guidance notification and treasure chest effect: te in FIG. 30)
In the specific example 2B of the second embodiment, the electric support guarantee 100th rotation arrives at the time te without winning the fall lottery within the electric support guarantee 100 rotations in the probable change state, and the latent probability change from the next 101st rotation. Right-handed is disadvantageous for the player because the state is in the state and the electric support is lost. Therefore, in FIG. 30, the guidance notification image 373 is switched from the right-handed notification to the left-handed notification at the timing of the time te when the symbol change at the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee ends.

  That is, the image is switched from the right arrow image 374a of “right arrow right” to the left arrow image 374b of “left arrow right”. The difference between the arrow image 374a and the arrow image 374b is only that the direction of the arrow image is switched from right to left, and the moving direction is unchanged before and after the switching.

  At the same time as the switching of the guidance notification image 373, the treasure box image 371 shown in FIG. 25B appears on the liquid crystal screen, and the player participation type treasure box effect starts, and the player opens the treasure box. Therefore, the push button is repeatedly hit, and attention is directed to that. As a result, it is late to notice that the guidance notification image 373 has changed from right-handed notification to left-handed notification, and the time when the player stops launching is not from the beginning of the symbol variation, but rather from the start of the symbol variation. It slips into the middle and to the end. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to enjoy the treasure chest effect.

(23-2. Gase treasure chest effect: t4 in FIG. 30)
In FIG. 30, during the latent probability change state before falling and winning, a command of the SP reach fluctuation pattern at the time of loss (successful treasure chest effect) is transmitted at time t4, and the state is changed to the “gase treasure box effect”, that is, the state without electric support. An effect unrelated to falling occurs. The treasure chest production here works as a production (skepticism production) that doubts that it has not yet fallen from the high probability state and is in the latent state (skeptical production), and "Gase's treasure chest production (treasure chest production success)" Definitely informing that it is in a certain state, or notifying that it is highly likely, "real treasure chest production (treasure box production failure)" is to definitely report that it is not in latent state, In this case, the treasure chest effect is to determine which treasure chest effect to present according to the current staging mode and game state (determined by lottery). Therefore, the treasure chest effect can be generated, thereby notifying whether or not the game is still in the high probability state or giving the player a guess element as to whether or not the game is in the high probability state. , Tension on treasure chest production Increases, so that the interest is growing for the game.

<24. Section length in which the treasure chest effect appears in the second embodiment: FIG. 31>
In the second embodiment, in the case of the specific example 2A in which the prize falls within 100 revolutions of the electric support (wins the fall lottery), the state with the electric support ends at the time te when the 100 revolutions of the electric support has elapsed and returns to the normal state. Then, the next symbol change display game is executed in the state without the electric support. Also, in the case of the specific example 2B in which the prize does not fall within the electric support guarantee 100 rotations, the state with the electric support ends at the time te when the electric support guarantee 100 rotations elapses, the state shifts to the normal state, and the next symbol change The display game is executed without the electric support. At this time, the guidance notification image 373 switches from the dynamic display mode of “right arrow right movement” to the dynamic display mode of “left arrow right movement”. That is, in the second embodiment, the time point te for switching to the left-handed guidance notification is known in advance. Thus, in the second embodiment, a treasure chest effect is made to appear over a plurality of symbol change operations before and after the symbol change, including a symbol change that causes a switch to the left-handed guidance notification. Then, the left-handed guidance notification is continuously finished up to the first rotation when the symbol variation display time is long, and up to a plurality of rotations (up to the second rotation in FIG. 31) when the symbol variation display time is short. I do.

  FIG. 31 exemplifies a section length in which a treasure chest effect appears in the second embodiment. In the first embodiment, the symbol changing operation is continued for about two to three rotations even after the switching point te in which the guidance notification image 373 has a dynamic display mode of “right arrow right movement” to “left arrow right movement”. However, in the case of the second embodiment (FIG. 31), the treasure box effect is started from a point in time that is several times before the switching point te by utilizing the fact that the switching point te is known in advance (FIG. 27). This is different from the case of the first embodiment (FIGS. 26 to 27).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 31, the treasure box effect is started from the symbol change operation (time tx at the 97th rotation) four rotations before the time te around the known time te at which the end of the guaranteed number of electric support 100 times comes. After that, a treasure chest effect is generated for each symbol variation display operation until the time te when the number of electric support guarantees is 100 (the 97th rotation to the 100th rotation), so that the boundary of the symbol variation is changed by the player. And continue treasure chest productions several times in a row. During this time, as shown in FIG. 28A, the guidance notification image 373 is displayed in a dynamic display mode of “moving right arrow right”. Then, from time te, the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the dynamic display mode of “left arrow right movement”. After that, treasure box effects are continuously generated with a total of six rotations (the 97th rotation to the 102nd rotation) until the second rotation (the 102nd point) at time ty. It is assumed that the treasure chest effect that continues from time tx to ty (the 97th to 102nd rotations) on the number of fluctuations is a continuous effect that does not make the player aware that the player is divided into multiple times, that is, a continuous effect. Let it come out.

  In this way, a treasure chest effect in which the effect push button is repeatedly hit is displayed from four times before (the 97th point) to after two times (the 102nd point) centering on the end point te of the 100 times of guaranteed electric support. The reason is that, in consideration of the fact that the variation pattern selected during the probable variation operation or the time-saving operation is often a normal variation pattern having a short time width of about 1 to 2 seconds, the guidance notification image 373 is set to the left-handed guidance. This is in order to prevent the player from being aware of the point at which the notification is switched.

  In the specific examples 2A and 2B of the second embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 31, the treasure chest that repeatedly hits the push button during a total of six rotations of the symbol variation from the 97th rotation to the 102nd symbol variation display operation. During the period in which the treasure box effect is continued, the guidance notification image 373 changes from the dynamic display mode of “right arrow right movement” (FIG. 28A) to the “left arrow right movement”. The point at which the time point of switching to the target display mode (FIG. 28 (b)) is created, whereby a distraction effect is exerted, and the time point at which the guidance notification image 373 switches to left-handed guidance notification is not noticed by the player. Like that. In addition, the treasure box effect is continued for a period until the second symbol change after the time te when the guidance notification image 373 switches to the left-hand guidance notification.

  The reason for this is that a treasure box effect continues even after the switch to the left-handed guidance notification, that is, after the symbol change display game at the 101st rotation is completed. The reason for this is that, in the case of a falling type or ST type gaming machine, considering that the digestion time required for one symbol change game is as short as about 1 to 2 seconds, the symbol change at the 101st rotation when the electric support is eliminated. In contrast to ending the treasure box effect with, the treasure box effect is continued over the period until the second symbol change after the time te, and the guidance notification image is displayed in the dynamic display mode of “left arrow right movement”. This is because the player can be made unaware of the point at which 373 is switched.

<25. Relationship between treasure chest effect and hold storage in the second embodiment: FIG. 32>
FIG. 32 shows another case in which the point at which switching to the left-handed guidance is switched is known in advance. This is an example in which a treasure box effect is produced by executing one or several symbol change operations until the hold memory in which the state with the electric support is ended is subjected to symbol change. This example is applicable not only to the specific examples 2A and 2B of the second embodiment but also to the specific example 3B of the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), in the specific examples 2A, 2B and 3B, while the guaranteed number of times of the electric support is not completed 100 times, the game ball is high on the movable wing piece 47 of the normal fluctuation winning device 41. Frequently, a prize is picked up in the lower starting port 35 and picked up at a lower frequency, so that a state is reached in which three to four upper limit storage memories are stored. FIG. 32 (a) shows that the “hold 1” of the hold memory corresponding to the 96th rotation of the 100 times of the electric support guarantee number is provided to the symbol variation display game, and the new hold memory is used as the hold memory is consumed. "Hold 4" is generated, and the "hold 4" is a hold storage corresponding to the 100th rotation of the guaranteed power supply support. At this time, on the liquid crystal screen, at the upper right corner of the in-game screen, a plurality of guidance information images 373 are arranged at a constant speed or intermittently in the right direction (direction along the broken arrow 375) with a plurality of right-pointing arrow images 374a arranged in a straight line. It is displayed in a dynamic display mode of “right arrow right movement” that sequentially moves, and it is notified to the player that right-handing is advantageous.

  When the hold memory at the 96th rotation is exhausted, the entire hold memory of “hold 1” to “hold 4” is shifted as shown in FIG. 32B, and the “hold 1” corresponding to the 97th rotation is shifted. The hold memory is provided for the symbol variation display game. At this time, a treasure chest effect appears on the liquid crystal screen as a skeptical effect that doubts the continuation of the electric support state. If the treasure box image 371 on the screen is opened by repeatedly hitting the frame effect button 13 corresponding to the push button image 372 shown in FIG. 32B, the state with the electric support is continued. At this time, the guidance notification image 373 continues to be displayed in the dynamic display mode of “Right arrow right movement”, and the right notification is continued.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 32 (c), the time te, which is the end of the 100 times of guaranteed power support, comes, and the storage of “hold 4” is provided to the symbol variation display game. However, the treasure chest effect is still continuing, and the guidance notification image 373 also continues the right strike notification in the dynamic display mode of “Right Arrow Right Movement”.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 32 (d), the hold storage of “hold 5” is provided to the symbol variation display game, and the symbol variation at the 101st rotation is started. Simultaneously with the start of the symbol change at the 101st rotation, the guidance notification image 373 moves rightward at a constant speed or intermittently sequentially with a plurality of rightward arrow images 374a arranged in a straight line. Is changed to the dynamic display mode of “left arrow right movement” in which a plurality of leftward arrow images 374b are arranged in a straight line and sequentially move rightward at a constant speed or intermittently.

  However, the right-pointing arrow image 374a in FIG. 32C and the left-pointing arrow image 374b in FIG. The switch from the guidance notification to the left-hand guidance notification is not so remarkable on the screen, and the change is hard to recognize. In addition to this, the treasure chest effect continues to appear in the pattern change of the 101st rotation, prompting the player to repeatedly hit the frame effect button 13. Therefore, the player is more likely to participate in the treasure chest effect and repeatedly hit. As a result, it is considered that the launching (right-handing) is often continued without stopping the launching after recognizing the switch to the left-handing guidance notification.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 32 (e), the hold storage of “hold 6” is provided to the symbol variation display game, and the symbol variation at the 102nd rotation is started. Although the guidance notification image 373 has already been switched to the dynamic display mode of "left arrow right movement", the treasure chest effect continues to appear even in the pattern change of the 102nd rotation, and the frame effect button 13 is repeatedly hit by the player. You are prompted to do. Therefore, in many cases, the player participates in the treasure chest effect in the symbol change of the 102nd rotation. As a result, until “hold 1” to “hold 6” are consumed, the player switches to the left-handed guidance notification and recognizes the switch to the left-handed guidance. It is thought that the striking will continue. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's nervous state and enjoy the treasure chest effect to the end over a plurality of continuous symbol fluctuations from the 97th rotation to the 102nd rotation.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 32 (f), the hold storage of “hold 7” is provided to the symbol variation display game, and the symbol variation at the 103rd rotation is started. At this point, the liquid crystal screen returns to the normal effect. Note that the left notification of the guidance notification image 373 is still continued, but does not appear after the required predetermined number of changes.

<Modification 1>
In the second embodiment (FIGS. 28 to 31), the case where the switching to the left-handed guidance notification is known in advance is focused on the 100th power support guarantee count. It is also possible to pay attention to the number. If there are a plurality of hold memories, it is possible to know that from the hold addition command. The treasure chest effect can also be generated over a symbol change corresponding to the number of the hold memories, provided that the hold memory has been won in the treasure chest effect generation lottery. In this case, the new hold memory that has won the lottery may be considered to correspond to the hold 4 (the 100th rotation of the end of the electrical support) in FIG. .

<26. Transition to production mode for notifying fall of the vehicle: FIGS. 33 to 35>
With reference to FIG. 29 to FIG. 32, a description will be given of the effect mode transition for notifying the falling performed in the specific examples 2A and 2B without any notice.

  When falling information indicating that the gaming state has fallen to the low-probability state is transmitted from the main control unit 20 by a winning command or a hold addition command, based on the falling information, "implication information relating to falling" is sent. It is configured to notify in the production mode. However, what is informed to the player as the suggestion information related to the fall is not of a nature that clearly conveys the fall, but of a nature that informs, or implies, the possibility of the fall. In the present specification, the stimulus given to the player regardless of whether the current gaming state is in the high-probability state or has fallen or is about to fall to the low-probability state is referred to as “implicit information”. Therefore, the implied information includes falling implied information that informs the user of the fact that the vehicle has fallen, and non-falling implicit information that informs the user of the fact that the user has not fallen.

  The means for providing the implicit information is, specifically, whether or not the player has fallen, that is, whether the current gaming state is in the high probability state, or has fallen or is about to fall in the low probability state, at the destination. It is realized by weighting a certain effect mode type (morning, noon, evening, night, night + rain of the background effect 361) in association with the game state at the start of the change when the symbol change display operation starts. I have. That is, the tendency of the effect mode to be easily shifted when falling down, in other words, to the effect mode to be difficult to shift when not falling down, is changed according to the game state at the start of the change.

  FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 show any one of a plurality of effect modes A to E prepared in advance as having different high-probability expectations regarding whether the game state is in the high-probability state. This indicates whether or not to make a transition, and both FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 constitute a transition destination mode distribution table. Here, “mode” is an abbreviation of the effect mode.

  This transition destination mode distribution table indicates which of a plurality of effect modes A to E prepared in advance when the mode transition trigger is established, assuming that the high probability expectation of the gaming state is different. The transition destination is determined based on whether or not the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation at which the symbol fluctuation display operation starts is the high probability state and whether or not there is a hold memory related to the on-hold in-place win, and shifts. By weighting so that the selection ratios of the preceding effect modes A to E are different, if the game state is in the low probability state or if there is a hold memory related to the on-hold fall election, it is determined according to the selection ratio. Thus, an effect mode is set so that an effect mode that is easy to shift when the player falls down is selected from the effect modes A to E.

  Of the tables constituting this transfer destination mode distribution table, the table in FIG. 33 is a combination of four factors (high / low probability state, presence / absence of electric support, presence / absence of on-hold fall election, presence / absence of on-hold continuous channel). (Hereinafter, simply referred to as state divisions), and one of a plurality of types of mode selection tables Ta to Td prepared for each state division is assigned, and the state divisions and the mode selection tables Ta to Td are assigned. (Hereinafter, simply referred to as a “state division association table”).

  In the table of FIG. 34, the selection ratios (distribution ratios) of the effect modes A to E selected as the transition destinations are determined by the mode selection tables Ta to Td assigned to the status categories in the status category association table of FIG. (Hereinafter, referred to as “production mode transition lottery table”).

  FIG. 35 shows a specific example of the above-described effect modes A to E. The effect modes A, B, C, D, and E are respectively a morning background effect, a daytime background effect, an evening background effect, a night background effect, and a nighttime effect. + Rain background effect. Of these effect modes A to E, effect modes A, B, C, and D are determined such that the high probability expectation increases in this order. The production mode D of the night background with the highest expectation is the jackpot determination mode. The night + rain background effect mode E is an effect mode in which a big hit can be expected in a state where the electric power support is present. For example, an effect called a chance time effect appears. Here, the state with the electric support means a state (high base state) in which a period during which the movable wing piece 47 of the normal fluctuation winning device 41 is opened and an opening extension function for extending the number of times of opening are provided.

(Mode transition opportunity)
These effect modes A to E are shifted to any one of the effect modes A to E through the state division association table (FIG. 33) and the effect mode shift lottery table (FIG. 34) on condition that a mode shift trigger is established. Mode switching to the effect modes A to E includes: (i) the end of a predetermined profit state such as the end of a big hit game or the end of a time saving state; and (ii) the reception of a specific effect control command such as an SP reach variation pattern. , (Iii) winning in the mode shift selection lottery, and (iv) that the number of times of loss change has reached a predetermined number of times.

(State classification association table: FIG. 33)
The state section association table in FIG. 33 defines the specification and type of the state section, and the allocation of the mode selection tables Ta to Td to this state section.

  In the state category association table of FIG. 33, four factors are involved in determining the state category. The first factor is whether the game state at the time when the mode change trigger is established and the special symbol change display operation starts is the high probability state or the low probability state (the probability state is high or low), and the second factor is The factor is whether or not the opening extension function is provided (presence or absence of electric support). Therefore, the game state at the start of the fluctuation is, as shown with a to d in FIG. 33, (a) high probability state + high base state (with electric support) = probable change state, (b) high probability state + Low base state (without electric support) = latent probability change state, (c) low probability state + high base state (with electric support) = time saving state, (d) low probability state + low base state (without electric support) = normal state , Are classified into four types.

  The third factor involved in the determination of the state division is whether or not there is a fall in hold on hold that exists when the mode transition trigger is established, that is, in the hold memory stored up to four, the fall lottery is won. This indicates whether there is something that is pre-read if it exists (fall on hold winning). Therefore, the above-mentioned probability change state and the latent probability change state are classified into a case where there is a pending fall winning (e, g column) and a case where there is no pending fall winning (f, h column), respectively. In other words, there is a case where there is a pending fall in the probability change state (e), a case where there is no pending fall in the probability change state (f), and a case where there is a fall in hold in the latent probability change state (g). And a case where there is no on-hold fall in the latent probability change state (h column).

  The fourth factor involved in the determination of the state classification is whether or not there is a winning jackpot (reserved consecutive champion), that is, if there is a jackpot lottery in the holding memory stored up to four, it is read ahead. This is whether or not there is something to be played (winning on hold big win). Therefore, in the above-mentioned probable change state, there is a case in which there is a falling in hold and no case (e, f columns), respectively, a case in which there is a winning in holding jackpot and a case in which there is no winning in holding jackpot (j, k; l, (m column), and in the case where the potential change in latency is with or without the on-hold fall win (g and h columns), the case with the on-hold jackpot win and the case without the on-hold jackpot win (n , O; p, q columns).

  That is, in the probable change state (column a), there is a probable change state in which there is a hold-in jackpot and a hold-in jackpot is won (column j: state division K1), and in the probable change state, there is a hold-in-place hit and there is no hold-in jackpot. In the case of (k column: state division K2), in the case of a probability change state, there is a hold inside jackpot without winning on hold, and in the case of l (state column K3), in the case of probability change, there is no hold inside jackpot without winning In the case of no winning (m column: state classification K2). In the latent probability change state (column b), in the case of the latent probability change state, there is a hold-in-place jackpot and there is a hold-in jackpot (in column n: state division K5), and in the latent probability-change state, there is a hold-in-place fall and there is a hold. When there is no jackpot winning (o column: state division K6), when there is a potential change in hold, and when there is a jackpot in hold without election winning (p column: state division K7), and when the odds change in hold And without a jackpot in the hold and no winning (column q: state classification K8).

  Next, in the case of the time reduction state (column c) and the normal state (column d), the gaming state is already in the low probability state, so that there is no event of falling from the high probability state. Therefore, the i column of the falling in hold is blank. Therefore, the time-saving state (column c) and the normal state (column d) are further classified into a case in which the retained big hit is won and a case in which the reserved big hit is not won (columns r, s; t, u). That is, with regard to the time reduction state (column c), there is a case where there is a retained big hit in the time reduction state (r column: state division K9), and a case where there is no retained big hit in the time reduction state (s column: state division K10). being classified. In the normal state (d column), there is a case where there is a retained big hit in the normal state (t column: state division K11), and a case where there is no reserved big hit in the normal state (u column: state division K12). are categorized.

  One of the mode selection tables Ta to Td is assigned to each of the state divisions K1 to K12 determined by the combination of the above four factors. In the case of the present embodiment, the mode selection table Ta is provided for the state sections K1 to K4, K9, and K10, the mode selection table Tb is provided for the state sections K6 and K12, and the mode selection table Tc is provided for the state sections K5, K7, and K11. , A mode selection table Td is assigned to the state section K8.

(Direction mode transition lottery table: FIG. 34)
FIG. 34 is an effect mode transition lottery table showing the relationship between the mode selection tables Ta to Td and effect modes A to E. The effect modes A, B, C, and D are determined so that the high probability expectation increases in this order. The effect mode D is the jackpot determination mode, and the effect mode E is in the high base state, so that the jackpot can be expected. Chance production mode.

  The effect mode shift lottery table of FIG. 34 includes the items of the mode selection tables Ta to Td, and each item Ta to Td is a list having the number of cells corresponding to the effect modes A to E to which the effect is shifted. The selection ratios for the effect modes A to E, that is, the values of the distribution ratios (selection ratio values) are set in a predetermined allocation distribution in the cells of each list. For example, the item of the mode selection table Ta is composed of a list composed of five cells corresponding to the effect modes A to E, and the first cell of the list contains the selectivity value for the effect mode A, and the second cell Is the selectivity value for effect mode B, the selectivity value for effect mode C in the third cell, the selectivity value for effect mode D in the fourth cell, and the selectivity value for effect mode E in the fifth cell. Selectivity values are set respectively.

  The list of each item of the mode selection tables Ta to Td includes selection ratio values (percentage values) of the mode selection tables Ta to Td when the overall distribution ratio for the effect modes A to E is 100%. The weights are provided so as to obtain a predetermined selection distribution (distribution distribution) as a whole. In the case of this embodiment, distribution distributions for the effect modes A to E are different from each other for each of the mode selection tables Ta to Td as follows. That is, the selectivity values of the effect modes A, B, C, D, and E are 0%, 0%, 0%, 0%, 100% in the mode selection table Ta, and 60%, 30%, 10%, 0%, 0%, the mode selection table Tc is 10%, 30%, 50%, 10%, 0%, and the mode selection table Td is 10%, 30%, 60%, 0%, 0%. Has become.

  Therefore, the mode selection tables Ta to Td include a first mode selection table Td in which the selection ratio for the effect modes A to C increases in the same forward direction as the effect modes (A to C) in which the high probability expectations are small; A second mode selection table (Tb) in which the selection ratio for the effect modes A to C is increased in a direction opposite to the order (C to A) of the effect modes with the high high probability expectations; And a third mode selection table Tc that includes a selection ratio for the effect modes A to C in the same forward direction as the order (A to C), and also includes a selection ratio for the effect mode in which the big hit is determined. Furthermore, there is a fourth mode selection table Ta that shifts to a chance time effect at a rate of 100%.

  Then, under the low base state to which the opening extension function is not added (b, d columns in FIG. 33), when the gaming state is in the low probability state, or when there is a hold memory related to the falling in hold winning election. In the (g, i columns in FIG. 33), the second mode selection table (Tb) is selected according to the selection ratio on the condition that there is no hold storage related to the winning in holdings (K6, FIG. 33). K12) The third mode selection table (Tc) is selected in accordance with the selection ratio on condition that there is a hold storage related to the winning in hold win (K5 and K1 in FIG. 33).

  In addition, under the high base state to which the opening extension function is added (the column a in FIG. 33), the game state at the start of the change is in the high probability state, and the hold memory related to the falling in hold winning in the hold exists in the hold. If not (column f in FIG. 33), the first mode selection table (Td) is selected in accordance with the selection ratio on the condition that there is no hold-in-winning winning storage (K4 in FIG. 33). 33), the third mode selection table (Tc) is set (K5, K1 in FIG. 33) so that the third mode selection table (Tc) is selected according to the selection ratio, on condition that there is a hold storage related to the winning in hold. You.

  Further, when the game state at the start of the change is in the low probability state (c, i columns in FIG. 33) under the high base state to which the opening extension function is added, the holding related to the winning in holding is performed. The first mode selection table (Td) is selected in accordance with the selection ratio on the condition that there is no storage (K10 in FIG. 33), and the selection ratio is determined on the condition that there is a hold storage related to the winning in hold. Is set so that the third mode selection table (Tc) is selected (K9 in FIG. 33).

  However, in the case of this embodiment, the state category association table is under the high base state to which the opening extension function is added (the column a in FIG. 33), and the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is in the high probability state and is suspended. If there is no hold memory related to the in-hold win, there is no hold memory (f column in FIG. 33), and if the game state at the start of the change is in the low probability state under the high base state with the opening extension function added If there is (the c and i columns in FIG. 33), the same fourth mode selection table (Ta) is selected instead of the first mode selection table (Td) (K1 in FIG. 33). To K4, K9 to K10).

(26-1. Relationship between presence / absence of on-hold fall winning and effect modes A to E: FIGS. 33 to 34>
The effect modes AE are selected via the mode selection tables Ta to Td described above.

(In the case of state division K1 to K4 = probable change state)
Referring to FIG. 33, in the case of state divisions K1 to K4, that is, when the gaming state at the start of the change is the “probable change state” with electric support (column a) with the high probability, the falling election is on hold. The same "mode selection table Ta" is selected for all of the status divisions K1 to K4, regardless of whether it is a certain case (column e) or a case in which there is no fall in the hold (column f). Is done.

  The mode selection table Ta is a table that is set so that the effect mode E is selected 100% and other effect modes are not selected (see FIG. 34). Therefore, when the mode transition trigger is established under the probable change state (state divisions K1 to K4), the effect mode E is selected via the mode selection table Ta, and under the high base state, the chance time effect mode (the possibility of a big hit) ( FIG. 35 (e) is started.

  For example, assuming that the mode change trigger has been established due to the end of the jackpot game and the entry into the probable change state (or the reception of a specific reach change pattern), the special symbol change display operation is started and the chance time effect mode is set. (Production mode E) starts. The transition to the chance time effect mode is performed irrespective of whether or not there is a hold memory related to a fall in hold or a win in hold at the start of the change. That is, when the transition of the effect mode occurs under the probable change state, the effect mode is always started from the chance time effect mode of the effect mode E.

(In the case of state classification K5 to K8 = latent probability change state)
In the case of the state divisions K5 to K8, that is, when the game state at the start of the change is the high probability state and the “latency probable change state” without the electric support (column b), when the mode transition trigger is established, the pending The type of the mode selection table to be selected differs depending on whether or not there is a hold storage of the fall winning.

(In the case of state division K5 to K6 = falling in the pending win)
In the case where there is a winning within the hold in the latent probability change state (column g), the mode selection table Tc or Tb is selected (column n, column o). Here, the mode selection table Tc is selected when there is a reserved big hit (state division K5), and the mode selection table Tb is selected when there is no reserved big hit (state division K6).

  The mode selection table Tc is set so that the selectivity values for the effect modes A, B, and C (FIGS. 35A to 35C) increase in this order, and the effect mode D (FIG. 35D) in which the big hit is determined. Is set to remain 10%. That is, the selectivity values of the production modes A, B, and C are determined in the order of the high probability expectation being high (the production mode A <B <C <D), and the production mode A (the high probability expectation is the lowest) Selection mode value 10%), high production mode B with medium probability high expectation (selection value 30%), production mode C with high probability high expectation (selection value 50%), high probability expectation It is the effect mode D (selection rate value 10%) in which the jackpot is low but the jackpot is determined. Therefore, as a means of implying that the player is in the high probability state and has a possibility of a big hit, the mode selection table Tc is used in the case of the falling in the hold and the big hit in the hold (state category K5). Assigned to be selected.

  On the other hand, the mode selection table Tb is set so that the selectivity values for the effect modes A, B, and C (FIGS. 35A to 35C) become smaller in this order, and the effect mode D (FIG. The possibility of selecting d)) is set to be 0%. That is, the selectivity values of effect modes A, B, and C are effect mode A (selectivity value 60%) with the lowest high-probability expectation, and effect mode B (selectivity value 30%) with the medium-high-probability expectation. The effect mode C (selection rate value: 10%) having the highest high probability expectation and the effect mode D (selection value value: 0%) in which the high probability expectation is low but the big hit is determined. The mode selection table Tb is selected as a means for informing the player that the possibility of the on-hold fall is high by implicit information in the case of the on-hold fall win and no on-hold big win (state category K6). It is allocated so that

(In the case of state division K7-K8 = no falling in hold pending election)
Next, in the case where there is no winning within the hold in the latent probability change state (h column), the mode selection table Tc or Td is selected (p column, q column). Here, the mode selection table Tc is selected when there is a reserved big hit (state division K7), and the mode selection table Td is selected when there is no reserved big hit (state division K8).

  The mode selection tables Tc and Td are both set so that the selectivity value increases in the order of the production modes A, B and C in the order of increasing the winning expectation, and the difference is that the mode selection table Tc has a big hit. The point is that there is a possibility of selecting the determined effect mode D (possibility 10%), and there is no possibility of selecting the jackpot-determined effect mode D (possibility 0%) in the mode selection table Tc. Therefore, in the case where the probability of change in latency has not been determined to fall within the hold, the player is informed by the implicit information that there is a possibility that the player may still be in the high probability state and that the player may have won the hold jackpot lottery. As a means for performing this operation, the mode selection table Tc is assigned so as to be selected in the case of a winning in a reserved big hit (state division K7). Similarly, in the case where the latent probability has been changed and there is no winning in the hold, and in the case where the jackpot in the hold has not been won (state category K8), the fact that there is a possibility that the player is still in the high probability state is notified by the implicit information. As means, the mode selection table Td is allocated so as to be selected.

(In the case of state division K9 to K10 = time saving state)
On the other hand, if the gaming state at the start of the change is the low probability state, an event of further falling from that state cannot occur (column i: blank). Therefore, in this case, only the presence / absence of the pending consecutive channels is a factor for selecting the type of the mode selection table.

  First, in the case of the state divisions K9 to K10, that is, when the game state at the start of the change is the low probability state but the high base state with the electric support (time saving state: column c), when the mode transition trigger is established, The mode selection table Ta is selected irrespective of whether or not the hold storage existing in the hold is the win storage of the big hit. Therefore, through the mode selection table Ta, the process is shifted to the chance time effect of the effect mode E in which there is a possibility of a big hit under the high base state. The chance time effect in the effect mode E is the same as the chance time effect selected in the state divisions K1 to K4 under the high probability state, and cannot be distinguished. Therefore, when shifting to the chance time effect, the player expects that the gaming machine is in the high probability state.

(4-2-4. State divisions K11 to K12 = normal state)
Next, in the case of the state divisions K11 to K12, that is, in the low-probability state and the low base state without power support (normal state: column d), if there is a hold memory of a big hit in the hold (column t) (state The section K11) and the mode selection table Tc are selected, and if there is no jackpot hold storage in the hold (column u) (state section K12), the mode selection table Tb is selected. The mode selection table Tb is set so that the selectivity values of the effect modes A, B, and C become smaller in this order, and the possibility of selecting the effect mode D with the fixed jackpot is set to 0%. . Therefore, as a means for informing the player that the possibility of the on-hold winning has been high, the mode selection table Tb is assigned so that the mode selection table Tb is selected when no on-hold jackpot is won (state division K12). .

(26-2. Characteristics of transition to the transition of the production mode)
The destination mode distribution table shown in FIGS. 33 and 34 has the following features.

(Feature 1)
When not falling down on hold (state divisions K3 to K4, K7 to K8: f, h columns) than when falling down on hold (state divisions K1 to K2, K5 to K6: e, g columns) ) Is easier to shift to the production mode with a high probability of expectation.

  Because, even if there is a relationship between the presence and absence of the on-hold winning, the same chance time is produced between the state divisions K1 to K2 (e column) and the state divisions K3 to K4 (f column) via the mode selection table Ta. Since mode E is selected, there is no difference. Further, even in the relationship between the presence of the winning in the hold and the absence of the winning in the same manner, the state division K5 (g column) and the state division K7 (h column) in the case of the big hit in the suspension are transmitted through the same mode selection table Tc. Since one of the effect modes A to D is selected with the same selectivity distribution, there is no difference. Therefore, there is a difference between the presence and absence of on-hold winning, and the only difference between the two is in the state section K6 (o column) and the state section K8 (q column). That is, between the state division K6 (column o) and the state division K8 (column q) when there is no big hit in the hold, the mode selection table Tb is selected in the former, whereas the mode selection table Td is selected in the latter. Selected. This is because the contents of the mode selection tables Tb and Td are different as follows.

  On the other hand, in the mode selection table Tb, the selectivity values for the effect modes A, B, and C are determined such that the selectivity values become lower in the order of the effect modes A, B, and C. It reaches as much as 60% (FIG. 34). However, from the viewpoint of the high probability expectation, the high probability expectation is higher in the order of the effect modes A, B, C, and D. Therefore, the effect mode A having the highest selectivity value has the higher selectivity value. It is in the relation that it is the lowest production mode. On the other hand, the mode selection table Td determines that the distribution of the selectivity values for the effect modes A, B, and C is opposite to that of the mode select table Tb, and that the effect modes A, B, and C have higher selectivity values in this order. Then, the selectivity value for the effect mode C reaches 60% (FIG. 34). Also, since the high probability expectation is determined to be higher in the order of effect modes A, B, C, and D, it is said that effect mode C having the highest selectivity value is the effect mode having the highest high probability expectation. In a relationship.

  Therefore, from these points, the case where there is no hold memory which has won the fall lottery in the hold than the case where there is a hold memory that has won the fall lottery in the hold (in the case where there is a fall in lot hold) ( It can be understood that the transition to the production mode having a high probability of high expectation is easier in the case where there is no winning in the hold.

(Feature 2)
In addition, the distribution of selectivity values for the effect modes A, B, and C are similar in the mode selection tables Tc and Td. The possibility of winning is also high, and if the effect mode D is selected on the effect mode transition lottery table via the mode selection table Tc, the winning of the retained big hit is determined. Therefore, the player is more likely to win the pending jackpot lottery as the ratio of transition to the production mode having the higher probability of high expectation (the production mode is higher in the order of production modes A, B, and C) among the production modes A, B, and C is higher. You expect that you are. Also, when the mode shifts to the night-background effect in the effect mode D, the player can immediately know that a big hit will occur just by the appearance of the night-background effect. Until the operation is performed, the hold memory (priority in the order of digestion) existing before the prefetch target reservation is subjected to the variable display operation and is waited for to be digested. You will enjoy the notice effect (for example, continuous notice effect) that appears in the display operation.

(Brackets in FIG. 33)
In the above embodiment, when there is a power support (state divisions K1 to K4 = probable change state, state divisions K9 to K10 = time saving state), when the mode transition trigger is established, the effect mode E is selected via the mode selection table Ta. Then, the chance time production mode, which is the production mode under the high base state, is started. That is, when there is an electric support, the same effect mode E is set regardless of the probability state, the presence / absence of falling in hold, and the presence / absence of consecutive chan in hold.

  However, as suggested in FIG. 33, the mode selection table Tc may be selected when the reserved big hit is won, and the mode selection table Td may be selected when the reserved big hit is not won. Since both the mode selection tables Tc and Td are set so that the selectivity value increases in the order of the effect modes A, B and C, the mode selection table Tc or Td is set in the same manner as when the mode selection table Ta is selected. By selecting this, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the user is still in the high probability state.

  It should be noted that the mode selection table Tc is selected in the case of the reserved big hit winning state divisions K1, K3, and K9, and the mode selection table Td is selected in the case of the reserved big hit non-winning state divisions K2, K4, and K10. The reason for this is that there is a possibility that the big hit determination effect mode D is selected for the mode selection table Tc (possibility 10%), but the big hit determination effect mode D is likely to be selected for the mode selection table Tc. Considering the difference that there is no (possibility 0%), they are properly used.

(Change of Tc Selectivity Value Distribution in FIG. 34)
In the case of the above embodiment, the distribution of the selectivity values for the effect modes A, B, and C in the mode selection table Tc is opposite to that of the mode select table Tb, and the selectivity values become higher in the order of the effect modes A, B, and C. Thus, the selectivity value for the effect mode C reaches as much as 60% (FIG. 34). However, while maintaining the relationship that it is easier to shift to the production mode with high probability expectation when not falling on hold than when falling on hold, the selectivity value distribution Can be changed to one having the same tendency as the mode selection table Tb. For example, the distribution of the selectivity values for the effect modes A, B, and C in the mode selection table Tc may be effect mode A (40%), effect mode B (30%), and effect mode C (20%), respectively. it can. Even with this setting, the ratio of the effect mode A being selected is reduced from 60% to 40%, so that the effect mode having a higher probability of expectation is higher in the mode selection table Tc than in the mode selection table Tb. Can be easily selected. In this case, since the mode selection table Tc is selected only when the winning in the reserved jackpot has been won, the player, for example, has won the jackpot because of the high probability state. Will understand.

(26-3. Transition to Effect Mode in Specific Example 2A of Second Embodiment: FIG. 29)
In the specific example 2A of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, a mode in which the parenthesized mode selection table Tc or Td is selected in the state divisions K1 to K4 (probable change state) and K9 to K10 (time saving state) in FIG. Is dealing with. At the time t1 in the figure, the 15R probability change jackpot is won. Thereafter, the symbol change display operation with the electric support is started from the time t2 when the 15R jackpot game ends, and until the time te when the 100th symbol change arrives. In the meantime, an example is shown in which a falling prize occurs (time t6) and various triggers for transition to the effect mode are established (time t2 to t5, t7 to t8).

(B) When a big hit end command is received (time t2 in FIG. 29)
If the mode change trigger is received by receiving the big hit end command at time t2 in FIG. 29 and no hold storage related to the falling prize is generated during the big hit game, the shift destination in the effect mode shift lottery process (step S748) With reference to the mode distribution tables (FIGS. 33 to 34), the effect mode of the transition destination is randomly selected according to the state division. The game situation at this time corresponds to the state division K4 in FIG. 33 (high-based probable change state, no falling in hold on hold, no big win in hold). Therefore, the mode selection table Td is selected in the state section K4 of the state section association table in FIG. 33, and based on the selection of the mode selection table Td, the effect modes A and B are displayed on the effect mode transition lottery table in FIG. , C are selected at a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, and 60%.

  29 shows a case where the effect mode C (the evening background in FIG. 35) is selected at a selection ratio of 60%. Considering this, except for the effect mode D in which the big hit is determined and the effect mode E which is a chance time effect, among the effect modes A to C, the effect mode C having the highest probability of high probability (the evening background in FIG. 35) ) Means that the transfer lottery has been drawn. When the effect mode C is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the evening background in FIG. 35, and the corresponding effect BGM flows from the speaker. Therefore, the player assumes that the gaming state is in the high probability state by shifting to the effect mode C (evening background).

  In addition, at time t2, when winning in the retained big hit lottery (state division K3), the mode selection table Tc is selected, and the effect modes A, B, C, and D are selected on the effect mode shift lottery table in FIG. Are selected at a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, 50%, and 10%. That is, regarding the high probability expectation, both the mode selection tables Tc and Td show the same tendency (high in the order of the effect modes A, B, and C), but when the effect mode is selected via the mode select table Tc, There is a possibility that the effect mode D of the big hit determination will be selected. This relationship is the same in the case of times t4, t5, t7, and t8 described later.

(B) Non-fall winning (time t3 in FIG. 29)
At the time t3 of the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29, it is assumed that a case in which the hold memory related to the non-fall winning is generated in the above-described effect mode C is a case 1 (no fall win in the hold).

  Case 1 is a situation in which a new winning ball is generated and “Reserve 4” is generated under the condition that the number of stored storages is three, and the reserved data is prefetched. “Reservation 4” is “prefetch target suspension” related to non-fall winning.

  When the pre-reading target reservation of “reservation 4” occurs, the effect control unit 24 performs a lottery as to whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice by the continuous notice effect. If it is determined that this prefetch notice lottery has been won and that the fall lottery has not been won, a pre-fall notice selection table corresponding to the number of holds is set. In this example, a notice selection table before falling for the number of holds 3 is set. Then, from the point in time when the symbol change of “hold 1” is started and the number of held memories is reduced to three, a lottery is performed on the continuity rank of the change-based continuous announcement effect at the start of change that is continued across the hold. Since the current gaming state is in the effect mode C, 0% in the continuity table (not shown), 1 time notice α, 2 times notice β, 3 times notice γ, and 4 times notice δ %, 10%, 30%, and 50%.

  In this example, it is assumed that four notices δ with a selection ratio of 50% have been selected on the continuity table. Therefore, four times up to the hold 4 (pre-reading target hold) relating to the non-fall winning are set as the number of continuous notices in the second consecutive notice counter (step S819). As a result, in each of the four symbol change display operations of Hold 1 to Hold 4, the lightning notice and its sound effect appear, and the continuous notice effect is executed.

  On the other hand, with respect to the pre-reading advance notice (continuous advance notice) of the hold display changing system, a dedicated hold display effect scenario is set at the point in time when it is judged that the reservation memory of “hold 4” has been generated and the above-mentioned preliminary look-ahead notice lottery has been won, “4” corresponding to the number of reserved storages is set in the first continuous notice counter. As a result, the hold storage position of the “hold 4” changes to, for example, red, and the display is continuously displayed while sequentially shifting the display position until the hold storage of the “hold 4” is used for the symbol change display operation. become.

  In this case 1, the number of continuations (the number of times that the lightning notice is continuously displayed over the hold) of the change-based continuous notice effect at the start of the change is the number of continuations of the look-ahead notice of the above-mentioned hold display change system (“hold 4”). (The number of times the red holding position is continuously displayed across the holdings). If the game state has fallen to the low probability state or if the player has won the on-hold fall, the notice selection table after the fall is referred to. May end shortly before reaching. However, in this example, in addition to the transition to the effect mode C (evening background), the continuous notice effect by the lightning notice reaches the red hold position of “hold 4”, that is, the “hold 4” of the red hold changes the symbol. The operation is continued until the display operation is performed. Therefore, the player is convinced from this that the gaming state has not fallen to the low probability state.

(C) When a specific fluctuation pattern designation command is received (time t4 in FIG. 29)
At a time t4 in the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29, when a specific change pattern specifying command (for example, a reach change pattern specifying command specifying a specific reach effect) is received and a mode shift trigger is established, the effect mode shift lottery In the process (step S748), the destination mode allocation table is referred to, and the effect mode of the destination is randomly selected according to the state classification. The game situation at this time is not different from that at the time t2, and is in the state division K4 in FIG. 33 (high-based probable change state, no falling in hold, no big hit in hold). Therefore, the mode selection table Td is selected in the state section K4 of the state section association table in FIG. 33, and based on the selection of the mode selection table Td, the effect modes A and B are displayed on the effect mode transition lottery table in FIG. , C are selected at a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, and 60%. FIG. 29 shows a case where the effect mode B (daytime background in FIG. 35) is selected at a selection ratio of 30%. This indicates that among the effect modes A to C, the effect mode B (the daytime background in FIG. 35) having the second highest probability of high expectation has been shifted to the lottery. When the effect mode B is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the daytime background in FIG. 35, and the corresponding effect BGM flows from the speaker. Therefore, the player is slightly worried that the game state may have fallen to the low probability state due to the transition from the effect mode C (evening background) to the effect mode B (daytime background).

(D) In the case of winning in the production mode transition lottery (time t5 in FIG. 29)
At a time t5 in the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29, a mode change trigger is received by receiving a variation pattern command other than the specific SP reach variation pattern and winning the production mode transition lottery performed on the production control unit 24 side. Indicates the case where the condition is satisfied.

  In this case as well, in the effect mode shift lottery process (step S748), the effect mode of the shift destination is randomly selected according to the state division by referring to the shift destination mode distribution table. The game situation at this time is not different from that at the time t2, and is in the state division K4 in FIG. 33 (high-based probable change state, no falling in hold, no big hit in hold). Therefore, the mode selection table Td is selected in the section K4 of the state section association table of FIG. 33, and based on the selection of the mode selection table Td, the effect modes A, B, C is selected at a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, and 60% (step S801 in FIG. 38). FIG. 29 shows a case where the effect mode C (the evening background in FIG. 35) is selected at a selection ratio of 60%. This indicates that among the effect modes A to C, the effect mode C (the evening background in FIG. 35) having the highest degree of high probability expectation has been selected by transition. When the effect mode C is set (step S802 in FIG. 38), the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the evening background in FIG. 35, and the corresponding effect BGM flows from the speaker. Therefore, the player assumes that the gaming state has not fallen to the low probability state by returning from the effect mode B (daytime background) to the effect mode C (evening background).

(E) When the prize has fallen (time t6 in FIG. 29)
At a time t6 in the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29, it is assumed that a hold storage related to a falling prize has occurred in the effect mode C. Here, a description will be given of a case 2 (with a fall in hold on hold).

  FIG. 12A shows a situation in which a new winning ball is generated and “reserve 4” is generated under the condition that the number of stored reservations is three, and the reserved data is determined to be prefetched. “Reservation 4” is “prefetch target suspension” related to the falling prize.

  When the hold storage of the “hold 4” occurs, the effect control unit 24 performs a lottery as to whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice by the continuous notice effect. If it is determined that the user has won the pre-read notice lottery and has won the fall lottery, a fall notice selection table corresponding to the number of holds is set. In this example, a post-fall notice selection table for the number of holds 3 is set. Then, from the point in time when the symbol change of “hold 1” is started and the number of held memories is reduced to three, a lottery is performed on the continuity rank of the change-based continuous announcement effect at the start of change that is continued across the hold. Since the current game state is in the effect mode C, 30%, 10%, and 40% of no notice, one notice α, two notice β, three notice γ, and four notice δ are displayed on the continuity table. , 20%, 0%.

  In this example, it is assumed that twice notice β with a selection ratio of 40% has been selected on the continuity table. For this reason, the two consecutive notices are set in the second consecutive notice counter as the number of consecutive notices, up to the reservation 2 before the reservation 4 (prefetch target reservation) related to the non-fall winning. As a result, in each of the symbol fluctuation display operations for the two times of Hold 1 and Hold 2, the lightning notice and its sound effect appear, and the continuous notice effect is executed.

  However, with respect to the pre-reading announcement effect of the hold display change system, when it is judged that the reservation memory of “hold 4” has occurred and it has been determined that the above-mentioned preliminary look-ahead announcement lottery has been won, the exclusive hold display effect scenario is set, and The corresponding "4" is set in the first continuous notice counter. As a result, the hold storage position of the “hold 4” changes to, for example, red, and the display is continuously displayed while sequentially shifting the display position until the hold storage of the “hold 4” is used for the symbol change display operation. become.

  In this case 2, the number of continuations (the number of times that the lightning notice is continuously displayed across the hold) of the change-based continuous announcement effect at the start of the fluctuation is the number of continuations of the look-ahead notice of the above-mentioned hold display change system (“hold 4”). (The number of times the red holding position is displayed continuously across the holdings). If the game state has fallen to the low probability state or if the player has won the on-hold fall, the notice selection table after the fall is referred to. May end shortly before reaching. Also in this example, although the mode has shifted to the effect mode C (evening background) having the highest high probability expectation, the continuous notice effect by the lightning notice does not continue up to the red hold position of “hold 4”, but before that. Is terminated when the “hold 2” is provided for the variable display operation. Therefore, the player can infer from this that there is a possibility that the gaming state has fallen into the low probability state on hold.

(F) When the number of times of the loss variation display operation has continued a predetermined number of times (time t7 in FIG. 29).
The time t7 in the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29 indicates a case where it is determined that the mode transition trigger has been established by the predetermined number of times of the loss variation display operation. In this example, a loss variation counter is provided on the effect control unit 24 side, the number of the received loss variation pattern commands is integrated by the counter, and the integrated value is a predetermined number of times of 30 (see FIG. 29). When the number of times reaches n times (n: an integer of 1 or more) 30 times, it is determined that the mode transition trigger has been established.

  Even in the case of the time t7, when it is determined that the mode transition trigger is established, in the rendering mode transition lottery process (step S748), the transition destination rendering mode is referred to, and the transition destination rendering mode is determined according to the state classification. Lottery. Since the game situation at this time is after the time t6 at which the falling prize has occurred, it is in the state division K10 (high-based time-saving state and no retained big jackpot won in FIG. 33). Therefore, the mode selection table Td is selected in the state section K10 of the state section association table in FIG. 33, and based on the selection of the mode selection table Td, the effect modes A and B are displayed on the effect mode transition lottery table in FIG. , C are selected at a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, and 60%.

  FIG. 29 shows a case where the effect mode A (morning background in FIG. 35) is selected at a selection ratio of 10%. This indicates that among the effect modes A to C, the effect mode A (the morning background in FIG. 35) with the lowest high probability expectation degree has been shifted to the lottery. When the effect mode A is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the morning background in FIG. 35, and the corresponding effect BGM flows from the speaker. Therefore, the player estimates that returning to the effect mode A (morning background) from the effect mode C (evening background) may have caused the gaming state to have fallen to the low probability state (actually, at the time This guess is incorrect because it has already fallen at t6).

(G) Further, the number of times of the loss variation display operation continues for a predetermined number of times (time t8 in FIG. 29)
The time t8 of the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29 shows a case where it is determined that the mode transition trigger has been established due to the predetermined number of times of the loss variation display operation. In this example, a loss variation counter is provided on the effect control unit 24 side, the number of loss variation pattern commands received is integrated by the counter, and the integrated value is again a predetermined number of 30 times (see FIG. 29). Reaches 30 × (n + 1) times), it is determined that the mode transition trigger has been established (step S703: YES).

  Since the game situation at this time is not different from that at time t7 (state division K10), the operation in the case at time t8 is the same as that at time t7. However, at time t8, among the effect modes A to C, a case where the effect mode B (the daytime background in FIG. 35) having the middle rank of the high probability expectation degree has been shifted and drawn is shown. When the effect mode B is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the daytime background in FIG. 35, and the corresponding effect BGM flows from the speaker. Therefore, by returning from the production mode A (morning background) to the production mode B (daytime background), the player connects expectations that the gaming state may still be in the high-probability state (actually, Has already fallen at time t6).

(H) When the power support is completed (time te in FIG. 29)
The time te of the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29 illustrates a case where the power support ends and a mode transition trigger is established. At this time te, the treasure box effect set in step S743 of FIG. 20 has priority, so that the effect mode cannot be shifted. However, it is also possible to cause overlapping, so a case where overlapping occurs will be described here.

  Although not shown, when the effect control unit 24 receives the remaining power support number command transmitted in step S407B of the special symbol change start process (FIG. 12), the effect control unit 24 sets the power support remaining number at which the power support ends. I do. Each time the decorative symbol designating command transmitted in step S415 (FIG. 12) is received, the mode transition trigger is subtracted from the remaining number of times of the electric support by one when the value becomes zero, that is, when the electric support is completed. Is determined to have been established. However, as another method, for example, a power support end command may be transmitted when the power support frequency counter becomes zero, and when the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it may be determined that the mode transition trigger has been established.

  In any case, when the power support ends and the mode transition trigger is established, in the rendering mode transition lottery process (step S748), the transition destination rendering mode is referred to, and the transition destination rendering mode is determined according to the state classification. Lottery.

  The game status at this time is after time t6 when the falling prize has occurred, and since the electric support has been completed, the game status is in the state classification K12 of FIG. Therefore, the mode selection table Tb is selected in the state section K12 of the state section association table in FIG. 33, and based on the selection of the mode selection table Tb, the effect modes A and B are displayed on the effect mode transition lottery table in FIG. , C are selected at a selection ratio of 60%, 30%, and 10%.

  FIG. 29 shows a case where the effect mode B (daytime background in FIG. 35) is selected at a selection ratio of 30%. This indicates that among the effect modes A to C, the effect mode B (the daytime background in FIG. 35) having the second highest probability of high expectation has been shifted to the lottery. When the effect mode B is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the daytime background in FIG. 35, and the corresponding effect BGM flows from the speaker. Therefore, the player determines that the possibility that the game state is still in the high probability state is low due to the transition from the effect mode B (daytime background) to the effect mode B (daytime background) (in practice) Has already fallen at time t6).

  As described above, in the case of the specific example 1 in FIG. 29, the player has selected the twice advance notice β having a low “continuity rank” at the time t6 when the player has won the on-hold lottery drawing (the lightning It is determined that the state has fallen from the high-probability state to the low-probability state based on the fact that the state has not been suspended (this determination is consequently correct), and thereafter, the production mode C having the highest high-probability expectation (the evening background in FIG. 35). ), It is determined that if a treasure chest effect occurs at time te, it must have almost fallen when the treasure chest effect occurs, and it is not expected that the result of the treasure box effect will be successful. Will be.

(26-4. Transition to effect mode in specific example 2B of second embodiment: FIG. 30)
The specific example 2B of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29 deals with a mode in which the mode selection table Ta is selected in the state divisions K1 to K4 (probable change state) and K9 to K10 (time saving state) in FIG. At time t1 in the figure, the 15R probability change jackpot is won. Thereafter, the symbol change display operation with electric support is started from time t2 when the 15R jackpot game ends, and until the time te when the 100th symbol change arrives. There are cases where no falling prize occurs between the two. At the time t2 when the 15R jackpot game ends, and at the time te when the 100th symbol change arrives, an effect mode transition trigger is established. In the subsequent period, a falling prize is generated (time t6), and various effect mode transitions are performed. An opportunity is established (time t3 to t5, t7 to t8). For the sake of simplicity, it is assumed that during the big hit game, no hold storage related to the falling prize is generated.

(A) When a jackpot end command is received (time t2 in FIG. 30)
If the mode change trigger is received by receiving the big hit end command at time t2 in FIG. 30 and no hold storage related to the falling prize during the big hit game, and in the effect mode shift lottery process (step S748), the shift destination mode With reference to the distribution table (FIGS. 33 to 34), the effect mode of the transition destination is randomly selected according to the state classification. The game situation at this time corresponds to the state division K4 in FIG. 33 (high-based probable change state, no falling in hold on hold, no big win in hold). Therefore, the mode selection table Ta is selected in the state section K4 of the state section association table in FIG. 33, and based on the selection of the mode selection table Ta, the effect modes A and B are displayed on the effect mode transition lottery table in FIG. , C, D, and E are selected at a selection ratio of 0%, 0%, 0%, 0%, and 100%. That is, the effect mode E (chance time effect) is selected at a selection ratio of 100%. This means that the effect mode E (the night + rainy background in FIG. 35) in which there is a chance of a big hit has been shifted to the lottery. When the effect mode E is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the night + rain background in FIG. 35, and the corresponding effect BGM flows from the speaker. Therefore, the player assumes that, by shifting to the effect mode E (night + rainy background), the gaming state is in the high probability state and the possibility of a big hit is high.

(B) When the power support is completed (time te in FIG. 43)
The time te in the specific example B shown in FIG. 30 illustrates a case where the power support ends and a mode transition trigger is established (the establishment of the mode transition trigger is the same as in the first embodiment). Also in the case of this specific example B, at time te, the treasure box effect set in step S743 of FIG. 20 has priority, so that the effect mode cannot be shifted. However, it is also possible to cause overlapping, so a case where overlapping occurs will be described here.

  If the power support ends and the mode transition opportunity is established (step S703: YES), the process proceeds to the effect mode transition lottery process (step S704, details of step S801 in FIG. 38), and the transition destination mode distribution table is referred to. The effect mode of the transition destination is randomly selected according to the state division (step S801 in FIG. 38). The game situation at this time corresponds to state category K8 in FIG. 33 (low-based latent probability change state, no falling in hold, no big hit in hold). Therefore, the mode selection table Td is selected in the state section K8 of the state section association table in FIG. 33, and based on the selection of the mode selection table Td, the effect modes A and B are displayed on the effect mode transition lottery table in FIG. , C are selected at a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, and 60%.

  FIG. 30 shows a case where the effect mode B (daytime background in FIG. 35) is selected at a selection ratio of 30%. This means that the effect mode B (the daytime background in FIG. 35) in which the high probability expectation degree is the middle rank has been shifted and drawn. When the effect mode B is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the daytime background in FIG. 35, and the corresponding effect BGM flows from the speaker. Therefore, the player ends the production mode E (chance time production: night + rain background) 100 times with the electric support without winning the jackpot lottery, and shifts to the production mode B (day background in FIG. 35). Although he is worried that the gaming state may have fallen into the low probability state, he will participate in the treasure chest effect while expecting the hopeful possibility that the gaming state is still in the high probability state.

  In addition, at time te, when the winning in the retained big hit lottery is won (state division K7), the mode selection table Tc is selected, and the effect modes A, B, C, and D are selected on the effect mode shift lottery table in FIG. Are selected at a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, 50%, and 10%. That is, there is a possibility that the effect mode D in which the big hit is confirmed is selected.

(C) Non-fall winning (time t3 in FIG. 30)
At time t3 in FIG. 30, it is assumed that a case where a hold storage related to a non-fall winning is generated in the effect mode B is a case 1 (no fall win in hold).

  In Case 1, when a new winning ball is generated under the condition that the number of stored storages is three, a “ready 4” of the look-ahead to be held related to the non-fall winning is generated, and the held data is determined to be a look-ahead. is there.

  If the pre-reading target reservation of this “reservation 4” occurs, and it is determined that the pre-reading advance drawing lottery regarding whether or not to perform the pre-reading advance notice by the continuous notice production is performed, and it is determined that the falling lottery is not won, Set the notice selection table. Then, from the point in time when the symbol change of “hold 1” is started and the number of held memories is reduced to three, a lottery is performed on the continuity rank of the change-based continuous announcement effect at the start of change that is continued across the hold. Since the current game state is in the effect mode B (daytime background), on the continuity table (not shown), no notice, one notice α, two notices β, three notices γ, and four notices δ are displayed. The selection is made at a selection ratio of 10%, 20%, 20%, 20%, and 30%.

  In this example, it is assumed that four notices δ having a selection ratio of 10% have been selected on the continuity table. For this reason, four times up to the hold 4 (pre-reading target hold) related to the non-fall winning are set as the number of continuous notices in the second consecutive notice counter. As a result, in each of the four symbol change display operations of Hold 1 to Hold 4, the lightning notice and its sound effect appear, and the continuous notice effect is executed.

  On the other hand, with regard to the prefetch notice effect of the prepend display change system, the judgment of step S825 in FIG. 40 becomes YES when the preservation storage of “hold 4” occurs and it is determined that the prefetch notice lottery is won. , The exclusive hold display effect scenario is set, and “4” corresponding to the number of stored holds is set in the first continuous notice counter. As a result, the hold storage position of the “hold 4” changes to, for example, red, and the display is continuously displayed while sequentially shifting the display position until the hold storage of the “hold 4” is used for the symbol change display operation. become.

  In this case 1, although the mode has shifted to the effect mode B (daytime background), the continuous notice effect by the lightning notice reaches the red hold position of “hold 4”, that is, the “hold 4” of the red hold changes to the symbol variation display operation. It continues until it is offered. Therefore, the player determines from this that the gaming state has not fallen to the low probability state.

(D) When a specific fluctuation pattern designation command is received (time t4 in FIG. 30)
At time t4 in FIG. 30, when a specific change pattern designating command (in the figure, a specific SP reach change pattern designating command) is received and the mode shift trigger is established, the transition is made in the effect mode shift lottery process (step S748). With reference to the destination mode distribution table, the effect mode of the transition destination is randomly selected according to the state classification. The game situation at this time is not different from that at the time te, and is in a state division K8 (low-based latent probability change state, no falling in hold, no big hit in hold) in FIG. Therefore, the mode selection table Td is selected in the state section K8 of the state section association table in FIG. 33, and based on the selection of the mode selection table Td, the effect modes A and B are displayed on the effect mode transition lottery table in FIG. , C are selected at a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, and 60%.

  FIG. 30 shows a case where the effect mode C (the evening background in FIG. 35) is selected at a selection ratio of 60%. This means that among the effect modes A to C, the effect mode C (the evening background in FIG. 35) having the highest high probability expectation has been shifted to the lottery. When the effect mode C is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the evening background in FIG. 35, and the corresponding effect BGM flows from the speaker. Therefore, the player assumes that the gaming state is in the high probability state by shifting to the effect mode C (evening background).

  In addition, at time t4, when the winning in the retained big hit lottery is won (state division K7), the mode selection table Tc is selected, and the effect modes A, B, C, and D are selected on the effect mode shift lottery table in FIG. Are selected at a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, 50%, and 10%. That is, regarding the high probability expectation, both the mode selection tables Tc and Td show the same tendency (high in the order of the effect modes A, B, and C), but when the effect mode is selected via the mode select table Tc, There is a possibility that the effect mode D of the big hit determination will be selected. This relationship is the same in the case of times t5, t7, and t8 described later.

(E) In the case of winning in the production mode transition lottery (time t5 in FIG. 43)
Time t5 in FIG. 30 shows a case where a mode change trigger is established by receiving a variation pattern command other than the specific SP reach variation pattern and winning the effect mode change lottery performed on the effect control unit 24 side. .

  In this case as well, in the effect mode shift lottery process (step S748), the effect mode of the shift destination is randomly selected according to the state division by referring to the shift destination mode distribution table. The game situation at this time is the same as that at the time te, and is in the state division K8 in FIG. 33 (low-latency latent probability change state, no falling in hold, no big hit in hold). Therefore, the mode selection table Td is selected in the state section K8 of the state section association table in FIG. 33, and based on the selection of the mode selection table Td, the effect modes A and B are displayed on the effect mode transition lottery table in FIG. , C are selected at a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, and 60%. FIG. 30 shows a case where the effect mode C (the evening background in FIG. 35) is selected at a selection ratio of 60%. Therefore, the player infers that the gaming state is in the high-probability state by shifting from the effect mode C (evening background) to the effect mode C (evening background).

(F) When the prize has fallen (time t6 in FIG. 43)
At time t6 in FIG. 30, it is assumed that a case in which a hold storage related to a prize-winning prize occurs under the above-described effect mode C is a case 2 (a prize-winning-in-hold win). The operation in this case is the same as that described at the time t6 in FIG. 30, and the description is omitted.

  At time t6, although the mode has shifted to the effect mode C (evening background) with the highest high probability expectation, the continuous notice effect by the lightning notice does not continue to the red hold position of “hold 4”, and is in front of it. Is terminated when the “hold 2” is provided for the variable display operation. Therefore, the player infers from this fact that the gaming state may have fallen to the low probability state in the pending state.

(G) When the number of times of the loss variation display operation has continued a predetermined number of times (time t7 in FIG. 43)
At a time t7 in the specific example 2B illustrated in FIG. 30, the mode change trigger (the establishment of the mode shift trigger is the same as that in the specific example 2A) is illustrated by the fact that the number of the loss change display operations has continued a predetermined number of times.

  When it is determined that the mode transition trigger has been established, the process proceeds to the rendering mode transition lottery process (step S748), and the rendering mode of the transition destination is randomly selected according to the state classification with reference to the transition destination mode distribution table. Since the game situation at this time is after the time t6 at which the falling prize has occurred, it is in the state category K12 of FIG. Therefore, the mode selection table Tb is selected in the state section K12 of the state section association table in FIG. 33, and based on the selection of the mode selection table Tb, the effect modes A and B are displayed on the effect mode transition lottery table in FIG. , C are selected at a selection ratio of 60%, 30%, and 10%. FIG. 30 shows a case where the effect mode A (morning background in FIG. 35) is selected at a selection ratio of 60%. This indicates that among the effect modes A to C, the effect mode A (the morning background in FIG. 35) with the lowest high probability expectation degree has been shifted to the lottery. When the effect mode A is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the morning background in FIG. 35, and the corresponding effect BGM flows from the speaker.

  Therefore, in addition to the fact that the continuous announcement effect by the lightning notice was not continued at time t6 until suspension of the prefetching target, at time t7 following this, the player switches from effect mode C (evening background) to effect mode A (morning background). It is presumed that the game state has fallen to the low-probability state is almost deterministic (the fact is that the fall has already occurred at time t6, so this estimation is correct).

(H) Further, the number of times of the loss variation display operation continues for a predetermined number of times (time t8 in FIG. 30).
At time t8 in FIG. 30, the integrated value of the loss variation counter for counting the number of received loss variation pattern commands is again a predetermined number of predetermined times of 30 (shown as 30 × (n + 1) th in FIG. 43). , And a mode transition trigger is established. Since the game situation at this time has not changed from that at time t7, the operation in the case at time t8 is the same as that at time t7.

  However, at time t8, among the effect modes A to C, a case where the effect mode B (the daytime background in FIG. 35) having the middle rank of the high probability expectation degree has been shifted and drawn is shown. Therefore, by returning from the production mode A (morning background) to the production mode B (daytime background), the player connects expectations that the gaming state may still be in the high-probability state (actually, Has already fallen at time t6).

<27. Specific Examples 3A and 3B of Third Embodiment>
In the probable falling type 2 of the third embodiment (sections d to e in FIG. 24), as in the probable falling type 1 of the second embodiment (sections b to c in FIG. 24), skepticism associated with the left-handed guidance information is also provided. An effect and a skeptic effect associated with the left-handed guidance notification can be configured to appear, and an effect of an effect mode that implies the current game state without any change can be made to appear.

(27-1. Specific Example 3A of Embodiment 3)
Category d in the third embodiment is a "probable change fall type 2" gaming machine in which the probable change state continues if it does not win the fall lottery even if the power support guarantee exceeds 100 revolutions. Since the 100th rotation arrives and the time changes from the time saving state to the normal state at the 101st rotation of the next symbol change, the relationship between the launch direction guidance notification and the treasure chest effect at the time of the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee (specification) Example 3A) is the same as the case of specific example 2A (see specific example 2A, time te shown in FIG. 29).

(27-2. Specific Example 3B of Third Embodiment: FIG. 36)
FIG. 36 is a skeptical production that doubts the continuation of the electric support state in the category e of the “probable change type 2” gaming machine in which the probable change state continues if the drop lottery is not won even if the electric support guarantee exceeds 100 revolutions. Is a specific example (specific example 3B in section e) when a treasure chest effect appears.

(27-2-1. Launch direction guidance notification and treasure chest effect: t6 in FIG. 36)
In the specific example 3B of the third embodiment, the drop lottery has not been won even if the electric support guarantee of 100 rotations during the probable change state is exceeded, and the probable change state continues after the 130th rotation (see time t6). When the player wins the falling lottery, the 130th rotation of the symbol changes to the normal state, the electric support is lost, and the right-handed player becomes disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, at the beginning of the 130th symbol change, the guidance notification image 373 is switched from the right arrow image 374a to the left arrow image 374b of "left arrow right", and whether or not the probable change state is continued, that is, the power support state. Treasure chest production appears as skeptical production that doubts the continuation of.

  The difference between the rightward arrow image 374a and the leftward arrow image 374b is that the direction of the arrow image is only switched from rightward to leftward, and the moving direction is unchanged before and after the switching. In addition, a treasure chest image 371 shown in FIG. 25 (b) appears on the liquid crystal screen, and a treasure chest effect of a player participation type is started. Attention will be directed to that. As a result, it is late to notice that the guidance notification image 373 has changed from right-handed notification to left-handed notification, and the time when the player stops launching is not from the beginning of the symbol variation, but rather from the start of the symbol variation. It slips into the middle and to the end. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to enjoy the treasure chest effect.

(27-2-2. Gase treasure box effect: t4 in FIG. 36)
In FIG. 36, during the probable change state before the falling prize, the command of the SP reach fluctuation pattern (successful treasure chest effect) is transmitted at time t4, and this is related to the treasure box effect of the gasket, that is, the fall to the state without electric support. There is a production without the effect (there is always an electric support). Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish between a real treasure chest effect (failure treasure box effect) and a gaseous treasure box effect (successful treasure box effect) due to the possibility of the gaseous treasure box effect, and a sense of tension on the treasure box effect. Will increase, and interest in ball games will increase.

(27-2-3. Transition to effect mode for notifying falling of the event: FIG. 43)
In the specific example 3B of the third embodiment, the transition to the effect mode for notifying the falling from the state with the electric support to the state without the electric support is the same as that described in the specific example 2B of the second embodiment (FIG. 30). is there.

<28. Effect Mode in Embodiment 4>
In the ST machine type according to the fourth embodiment (section f in FIG. 24), when the predetermined number of STs is completed and the electric power support is not performed, the switching to the left-handed guidance is performed. Therefore, in the symbol variation that has become the state without the electric support, or over one or more symbol variations from the symbol variation, or over a plurality of symbol variations before and after including the symbol variation, it is associated with the left-handed guidance notification It is configured to produce skeptical productions. However, in the case of the fourth embodiment, as described above, the end timing of the state with the electric support is fixed, and therefore, in the symbol fluctuation in the state without the electric support, or over one or more symbol fluctuations from the symbol fluctuation. Alternatively, if the skeptic effect is only caused to appear over a plurality of symbol variations before and after including the symbol variation, it simply informs the end of the state with the electric support (the end of the specified number of STs). It becomes the thing of. Therefore, like the second embodiment, the treasure chest effect according to the fourth embodiment is preferably used as a notice effect that stimulates a sense of expectation of winning a big hit. Specifically, during the ST, a “real treasure chest effect (failure treasure box effect)” appears in the case of a specific loss variation pattern (for example, SP reach variation pattern), and in the case of a hit variation pattern, Gase treasure chest production (success treasure chest production) ". A treasure chest that indicates a player's expectation of winning rather than simply displaying a treasure chest effect with a pattern fluctuation around the specified number of STs by causing a real treasure chest effect and a gaseous treasure box effect to appear at an appropriate frequency. The opportunity to pay attention to the effect increases, and the time when the player can recognize that the guidance notification image 373 has been switched can be delayed, so that the above-described distraction effect effect can be obtained.

<29. Other display modes of launch guidance information>
In the above-described embodiment, the means for displaying the right-handed display mode and the left-handed display mode in an extremely close manner is defined as follows. That is, as the “display mode indicating the right-handing direction” of the guidance notification image 373, the “right-arrow right-moving” movement in which a plurality of right-facing arrow images 374a are arranged in a straight line and sequentially move rightward at a constant speed or intermittently. In addition, as the “display mode indicating the left hitting direction”, a motion of “left arrow right motion” in which a plurality of leftward arrow images 374b are arranged in a straight line and sequentially move rightward at a constant speed or intermittently is used. (A), (b) and (a), (b) of FIG. Then, this was displayed at the same or substantially the same position on the liquid crystal screen with the same or substantially the same size and the same system color. On the liquid crystal screen, (i) display at the same or substantially the same position, (ii) display at the same or substantially the same size, (iii) display at the same (system) color, (iv) move in the same direction Or, it is a display mode that includes an element of slide display in a complex manner. In addition, with this configuration, a gaming machine that does not give a falsehood to the player and takes time to notice a change in the guidance notification mode does not significantly detract from the interest of the player. I made it possible.

  However, the condition of the same or substantially the same size and the same system color at the same or substantially the same position on the liquid crystal screen does not necessarily need to be held as a common matter between right-handed notification and left-handed notification. Means for displaying the right-handed display mode and the left-handed display mode in an extremely close manner include one of them, for example, a dynamic display mode of “Right Arrow Right Movement” and a dynamic display mode of “Left Arrow Right Movement” If you can get the initial effect of `` making the switch to left-handed notification difficult to understand and not understand '', you are free to decide how to do other elements, on the LCD screen Can be displayed in different positions, in different sizes, or in different colors.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, only the “arrow image” is treated as a component of the guidance notification image 373, and a plurality of the arrow images are arranged in a straight line. The message image using characters may be used as a component of the guidance notification image 373, and the “message image using left-handed characters” may be used alone to configure the guidance notification image 373.

  Also, instead of using "arrow images" or "message images with left-handed characters" alone, a combination of "arrow images" and "message images with left-handed characters" or "arrow images" The guidance notification image 373 may be configured by a combination of “a message image with characters such as left-handed characters” and “signs and patterns having no meaning”. As the display mode, for example, the guidance notification image 373 can be displayed in a display mode in which a “message image by characters such as left-handed characters” and an “arrow image” are arranged in a straight line.

  In the above embodiment, the display mode is a display mode in which a plurality of components of the guidance notification image 373 are arranged in a straight line. However, the number of components of the guidance notification image 373 is not limited, and is not necessarily aligned in a straight line. You don't have to. In addition, even if it is referred to as a straight line, it is acceptable that the line is substantially a straight line. In addition, a part or the whole may be displayed in a plurality of rows in a form in which a plurality of arrows run in a direction intersecting the traveling direction.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the guidance notification image 373 is displayed in a partial area on the liquid crystal screen. However, a display mode in which the screen moves and passes across the screen from one end to the other end of the screen may be adopted.

<Modification 2>
In the first to sixth embodiments, as the “display mode indicating the left hitting direction” of the guidance notification image 373, a plurality of left-pointing arrow images 374b are arranged in a straight line and sequentially move rightward at a constant speed or intermittently. The "dynamic display mode" of "left arrow right movement" is used, and the left-handed guidance notification in the dynamic display mode of "left arrow right movement" is to be continued until a predetermined output end time (see FIG. 23). Steps S781 to S783). However, the left-handed guidance notification does not necessarily have to be displayed in the same display mode until the end over the entire period up to the predetermined output end time. A clear dynamic display mode of "left arrow left movement" in which a plurality of left arrow images 374b are arranged in a straight line and sequentially move leftward at a constant speed or intermittently from the middle of the entire period up to the output end time. Can be switched to This is in order not to impair the reliability of the gaming machine.

  In the above-described first to sixth embodiments, the display effect using the guidance notification image of “right-handed notification” and “left-handed notification” has been described as an example. It is not limited to the case of changing the display mode of the status change lamp.

<Modification 3>
For other image display effects, for example, the display mode is changed according to a predetermined condition (e.g., time elapse during a specific effect or reception of a specific effect control command) for a hold display or a character display. The present invention is also applicable to such a case. More specifically, the character (left of the hold display) shown in FIG. 25A is set so as to change in accordance with the number of changes and other conditions (such as the number of reach and the winning of the change lottery). In such a case, when the aspect changes, the player's attention may be temporarily diverted from the character by generating the above-described treasure chest effect.

  In addition, referring to FIG. 25 and the like, an announcement effect (“Treasure Box Effect”) which suspects that the gaming state on the main control unit 20 side may have shifted from the state with the electric support (probable change state) to the state without the electric support (“ Skeptical production "), but is not limited to this. For example, a treasure chest effect and other effects may be used as “expectation effect (general term for effects in which the degree of expectation to be a big hit is set relatively high)”.

  Further, when the above-described effect or the like is used as a feeling-of-expectation effect, by using the above-mentioned “distraction effect”, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes the player feel more interesting. This will be described in detail below. In this example, an example in which a look-ahead notice (hold change notice) of a hold display change system is adopted as the expected feeling effect will be described as a representative example.

  More specifically, “hold display” is performed on the liquid crystal screen as a first object (meaning an object, an object, a purpose, or the like) that directly or indirectly indicates a winning expectation based on the display (or display change). Here, the expression “directly or indirectly indicating the expectation of winning” due to the display mode of the “operation holding ball” or a change in the display mode means, for example, that when the white hold display is set as the normal display mode, blue , The winning expectation is about 1% to 10%, when it changes to green, the winning expectation is 20% to 30%, and when it changes to red, the winning expectation is 40% to 50%. When the winning expectation is directly indicated, for example, when it changes to "rainbow color" or when the number "100%" is added, the winning expectation is "100% (accurate)". (Specifying the expected degree of winning).

  When the first object is displayed (or changed in display) or is displayed, another second object is displayed. Here, as the display of the second object, for example, “character” is displayed (character image display). This second object may itself be an expected effect, a notice effect in which the winning expectation is not relatively high (low expectation effect), or a notice effect that does not indicate the winning expectation (for example, Or an effect that occurs irrespective of the jackpot lottery result or an effect that occurs periodically (a specific background change effect).

  Taking the case where the second object is also a feeling of expectation notice as an example, a character can be displayed near the center of the screen when the hold display is performed. A plurality of types of characters to be displayed are prepared (for example, characters A to D), and if character A is a default (initial setting) pattern, as in the case of the change in hold display, the expected degree of winning increases when character B is displayed. When the character C is displayed, the degree of expectation is further increased (large expectation), and when the character D is set, it is possible to set such that the big hit is determined. Further, any of the characters A to D may be displayed at the start of the display, or may be changed to another character after any of the characters is displayed.

  Here, the characteristic points of this example relate to the “display start timing” and “display end timing” (both are “display periods”) of the first object and the second object, respectively. , "Display size", and "display hierarchy priority (priority)".

<Display start timing, display end timing, display period>
The hold display itself is basically always displayed except for a predetermined timing such as a specific SP reach when the operation hold ball exists, but the “hold change (change to the exclusive hold display mode)” is described. Is not necessarily generated every time because it is determined by a prefetch notice lottery, and the frequency of occurrence is appropriately set according to the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine. Here, the “display start timing” relates to the occurrence of the “hold change”, and indicates the point in time when the switching from the hold display mode A to the hold display mode B is started. Then, the point in time when the display is completely switched from the hold display mode A to the hold display mode B is set as the display end timing, and the period from the display start timing to the display end timing is set as the display period (display change period). As described above, the display period refers to the period of the specific display (here, the change in hold), and the object (here, the hold display) includes the non-display state before and / or after the specific display. It is not limited to one. Further, the terms “display change start timing”, “display change end timing”, and “display change period” may be replaced as necessary.

  Note that the period required for the pending change is not limited to one type, and may be two or more types. For example, when the color changes from white to blue, the change is completed in a short time (for example, 50 msec) without using any special effect. When the color changes from blue to red, a bomb is set on the blue hold display and explodes. The change is completed in a relatively long time (for example, 500 msec) by using a special effect such as changing to a red hold display after being covered with smoke, or gradually changing a blue hold display to a red hold display. You may do it. However, even if a special effect appears, the hold color does not change (the bomb does not explode and the hold color does not change). By allowing the real thing and the gasket to appear, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of changing the hold.

  Taking the above matter into consideration, the relationship between the “hold display” as the first object and the “character display” as the second object will be summarized. The display timing, display period, etc. of each effect are coordinated well so that attention is deviated from the suspended display by using the "deviation effect". This will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 37 shows an example in which a character appearance effect of causing the character A to appear is adopted as a distracting effect when a pending change notice is scheduled for an existing specific hold display. FIG. 38 is a time chart relating to the display example of the pending change notice and the character A in FIG. In FIG. 37, the hold display to be changed in hold is a hold icon of the hold display section c1 in the hold display area 76.

  Referring to FIG. 37 and FIG. 38 (A), first, an operation holding ball is generated (time t1 in FIG. 38 (A)), and the hold display is started (FIG. 37 (A)). At this stage, the white color is normally reserved. Then, when the suspension change notice is not started (time t1 to time t2 in FIG. 38 (a)), a female character A is displayed substantially at the center of the screen (time t2 in FIG. 38 (a), FIG. 37). (B)). Here, as shown in FIGS. 37 (b) to (d), it is assumed that the character A appears at a predetermined timing before the hold change, and then comes close to the player side while waving and conversing. It is the appearance appearance of the character that was expressed. While this character A is displayed and the player takes care of the character A, the holding change is started (time ta in FIG. 38, FIG. 37 (d)). Here, as an example of the reserved change notice, the reserved change notice is that the white reserved is gradually changed to the red reserved.

  After the hold change is completed (time tb in FIG. 38 (a), FIG. 37 (e)), the display of the character A is ended (time t3 in FIG. 38 (a), FIG. 37 (f)). In the case of this example, the character A appears (displays) a predetermined time before the hold change is made, and at least a period from the start of the hold change to the end of the hold change (time ta to tb in FIG. 38A). , The character A is displayed (the character A display period from time t2 to time t3 in FIG. 38A). As a result, the player who has been distracted by the character A may change the hold display to another display mode (in this case, from the normal hold display mode (white hold) to the dedicated hold display mode (for example, red hold )) To be surprised (FIG. 37 (f)). In particular, in the character appearance effect of the present example, a “conversation effect” such as displaying information related to a game in a balloon is also executed (FIG. 37E), and the player's consciousness is directed to the information in the balloon. This effectively diverts the player's attention from the pending change notice. It is considered that the degree of wonder at which the player notices the change in hold increases as the change to the exclusive hold display mode (high expectation effect presentation) with a high degree of expectation of winning increases. In this way, the pending change announcement with the distraction effect can exert a more impactful rendering effect than making the pending change announcement appear alone.

  In the example of FIG. 38 (a), a case in which both the change start and the change end of the first object are performed during the period in which the second object is displayed (the display change period of the first object in the second object display period). Case where everything is included). In this example, the display start time of the second object (time t2) and the change start time of the hold display (time ta) may be the same, or the display end time of the second object (time t3) may be the same as the hold display time. The change start time (time tb) may coincide. In other words, the display of the second object can be controlled in parallel with the display of the first object so as to include the entire display change period of the first object.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 38B, not only the example of FIG. 38A but also any one of the change start and the change end of the first object is included in the display period of the second object. The minimal distraction effect is exhibited. In other words, the display of the second object can be controlled so as to be parallel to at least a part of the display change period of the first object. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 38B, in the “hold change period C” shown, the change start time of the hold display (time te) is included in the display period of the character A (time t2 to t3). However, this shows an example in which the end time of the change of the hold display (time tf) is not included in the display period of the character A. In the illustrated “hold change period B”, the change start time of the hold display (time tc) is not included in the display period of the character A, but the change end time of the hold display (time td) is in the display period of the character A. It is an example that is included.

<Display position>
In the above example, of course, the character display can also be changed in the display mode (for example, the display mode of one person character is changed, or one person character is increased to three identical or different person characters, etc.). However, in this case as well, it is preferable to distract the attention from the pending change. For example, after one person is displayed on the right side of the liquid crystal screen, one person is displayed on the left side of the screen after a while (after a predetermined time has elapsed). As a result, the interest of the player extends to a plurality of events, such as the player watching the character on the right side of the screen and then gazing at the character on the left side of the screen, and distracts the attention from the hold display at the bottom of the screen. be able to. As described above, as the second object display, after the first image display effect (the first notice effect) is displayed, the second image display effect (the second notice effect) can be displayed.

<Display size>
In addition, when a large object and a small object (or an aggregate and an individual) are displayed as the display objects, the player's attention and line of sight tend to face a large object (an aggregate). If it is desired to use this to secretly change the hold, it is possible to distract the line of sight by displaying a larger object (or a plurality of objects). Utilizing this, it is possible to divert attention from the reserved ball by displaying a large character display (or displaying a plurality of characters).

<Priority of display hierarchy>
In addition, the expression “distracted” does not necessarily need to be displayed completely independently at the same timing. That is, at the timing of performing the hold change, a character may be displayed over the hold display (so as to cover the front of the hold display) (target concealment type distraction effect). This physically prevents the player from visually recognizing the hold display, and consequently distracts the attention from the hold display. The hold display may be completely hidden by the character, or a part of the hold display may be made visible. In this case, considering that the hold display (the current number of active reserve balls) is kept in a concealed state, the active reserve ball is set in another place (meaning another place on the display area or another display means). Displaying the number can prevent the player from being confused.

  In the above, the first object is described as “hold display” and the second object is described as “character display”. However, it is needless to say that the first object side is “character display” and the second object side is “hold display”. It is possible. Since the purpose is common and the purpose is to temporarily deviate from the production with high importance, if the production with high importance is the character display side (first object), the hold display side will be the second object. It is a means to look away from the character display. In this case, the above-described display timing, display position, display size, and the like naturally correspond to them.

  Further, the first object and the second object are not limited to the above two types, and there is a possibility that all other objects are displayed. However, it is preferable that at least the first object display (the object display side for the purpose of distraction) has an expected feeling effect that can indicate the winning expectation degree. Further, as described above, the degree of wonder when the player notices is higher when the high expectation effect (display of the first object) is set as a target of distraction. Therefore, in the case of a notice effect that can indicate the level of the expected win due to a difference in the display mode, such as a change notice of the hold, a display mode in which the win expectation is relatively low (for example, the hold display is a blue hold) , Yellow hold, green hold, etc.), when the display mode (for example, the hold display is red hold, D pattern hold, iridescent hold) appears with a relatively high winning expectation. However, it is preferable to execute a distraction effect (display of the second object) with a high probability.

<Modification 4>
In the third modification, the example in which the image display effect is used as the “distraction effect” has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, people tend to pay attention to things that move three-dimensionally, and make use of movable bodies (moving body effects (sound effects and light that appear along with the movement of movable bodies). By causing the effect (including the effect) to appear, it is possible to divert the player's attention from the target object for distraction (the display object such as the change in hold described in the third modification). Specifically, (α) a movable body effect is displayed in place of the second object display (character A in FIG. 37), or (β) a movable body effect is displayed together with the second object display, or (γ). And (2) displaying the second object as a movable body effect as a precursor effect. In particular, in the case of the above-described form (γ), the second object display is displayed following the movable body effect, so that once the player's attention is directed to the movable body, the second object display is further displayed. Therefore, since the player's attention can be directed to the liquid crystal screen in two steps, the attention to the target object (first object display) is lower, which is suitable for obtaining a distraction effect effect. .

  Note that the movable object is disposed outside the liquid crystal display device. In the case of this example, as shown in FIG. 2, a first movable body accessory (clock-type accessory) 80 is disposed on the upper right side in the center decoration 48, and the second movable body is provided diagonally below the right side. An accessory (flower-shaped accessory 90) is provided. For this reason, when the player's line of sight is directed to the movable body, there is a certain time difference between when the player looks at the movable body effect and when he or she turns his or her line of sight to the effect on the liquid crystal screen. Therefore, there may be a case where a distracting effect can be obtained even if the operation period of the movable object does not necessarily overlap with the suspension change period. For example, taking the case of the above (α) as an example, as shown in FIG. 38 (C), the operation period of the movable body accessory (time tw (at the start of the accessory operation) to time tx (the accessory operation) (End point)) and the display change period of the hold change (hold change period D: times ty to tz) can be executed without being parallel (overlapping). In the example of FIG. 38 (c), a period corresponding to the above-described time difference from when the movable body effect is visually recognized to when the line of sight is turned to the liquid crystal screen is represented as “time tx to tz”. The times tx to tz function as a substantial distraction period, and if all or a part of the period includes the suspended change period, a distraction effect can be obtained.

<Modification 5>
As described above, the effect control unit 24 includes information (for example, pre-reading fluctuation pattern information, fluctuation pattern information (variation time information) included in a winning command, a fluctuation pattern specification command, a decorative design specification command, a command during a hit game, and the like. , Various announcement effects are controlled based on the reach effect type (including presence / absence) and information on pseudo-runs), jackpot lottery result information (winning lottery result information, symbol lottery result information, etc.) . Among the announcement effects, as typical announcement effects by image display, there are display patterns related to a reach effect, a pseudo continuous production, a look-ahead announcement effect, a character announcement effect, a cut-in announcement effect, a step-up announcement effect, and the like.

(6-1. Notice effect using color elements 1: FIG. 39)
Next, the “announcement effect using color elements” will be described. Here, “color element (color vision)” has the same meaning as “color”. Therefore, as in the case of saying "color", the case of "chromatic color" including all three dimensions of hue (hue), lightness, and saturation (saturation), and the case of "achromatic color (white, Gray, black) "). In particular, the expression “using color elements” does not mean that there is color, but the mode in which only a part of the screen is colored, and the entire screen is colored. This is because it is desired to express the liability that the case of the embodiment is subordinate. Hereinafter, the same applies to the case where the term "color" is used in the present specification, for example, the term "color of a character image". Unless otherwise specified, the case where a color is applied to a character image displayed on a part of a screen is described. Shall mean.

  The “notification effect by image display” handled in the present embodiment is a display mode in which a plurality of display objects similar to a part of the screen are displayed as images, in other words, “notification effect using color elements”. . “Similar” means similarity between display objects such that a player recognizes them as the same type of display objects (components) because some of the display modes are common. Therefore, for example, even a display object having a different shape (for example, ○ and Δ) is unified with the same achromatic color (white or black), or given a specific same color (red or rainbow color). If the players are similar and recognize them collectively, the different displayed objects (○ and Δ) are “similar display objects”. In other words, in the display objects having the same shape (for example, an image imitating a dog as an animal), even if only a part of each display object (the part of the dog's torso) is given the same color. If the player can recognize that the entire display (the entire dog) has a commonality because the colors are the same, the entire shape including the colored portion (the torso) (the entire dog) ), Both are "similar display objects".

  Here, as a plurality of similar display objects displayed on the screen, a “character notice effect” imitating a person will be described as one of the notice effects. The character announcement effect is generated as a part of the announcement effect or as a demonstration screen effect during a period in which the design change is stopped.

  FIG. 39 exemplifies a character preview effect, which belongs to a so-called “image display advance effect”. In the case of the illustrated character announcement effect, a plurality of four character (component groups of the display pattern) images a to d are displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Character images are common in that they all have the same person shape, and this is an example in which a player recognizes a plurality of similar display objects or the same plurality of display objects.

  FIG. 39 (a) shows a display mode in which, in the character announcement effect, as a normal reach effect, four identical character images a to d in which a chromatic color is applied in the background image, that is, color display is performed. Is shown. All character images a to d are display modes in which the same chromatic color is applied, and the background is the same as the normal chromatic color of the decorative pattern, and the hold display does not change from the normal color white. It is in the state (no notice of pending change). However, since as many as four character images a to d appear, it is informed that the degree of expectation of winning is medium among the three levels of large, medium and small.

  FIG. 39 (b) shows that, in the character announcement effect, it is assumed that the degree of expectation of winning is extremely high, and for one of the four character images a1 to d1 (character image c1), the character has a rectangular shape around the outer contour. 9 shows a display mode that appears around a background image. 39A is different from FIG. 39A in that (i) one character image (specific character image) c of the four character images is colored with “white” having high brightness among achromatic colors. (Ii) The other character images a, b, and d are replaced with character images' a1, b1, and d1 colored with "black" having low brightness among achromatic colors. (Iii) The decorative pattern that has stopped changing has been changed to a low-brightness “decorative pattern image colored with“ black ”” among achromatic colors, and (iv) the character image (specific character image) c1 The point is that the character image c1 is surrounded by a rectangular character background image colored in “black” with low brightness among the achromatic colors. The background and the hold display remain the color display without any color change. If the outline of the character outline and the inside are black, the appearance of the character is unknown, so that the character is displayed as a so-called silhouette image. The character background image is used as a background image for emphasizing the character image. The shape of the character image is not limited to a rectangular shape, and may be a circle, an ellipse, a polygon, or the like. The background image is not particularly limited as long as it is expressed as follows. However, there may be no character background image, and the points different from FIG. 39 (a) may be at least the above (i) to (ii). The character background image is similar to the aura image of FIG. 42B described later.

  Here, the specific character image c1 is expressed as a character image colored in “white”. However, when the display object on the liquid crystal screen is described as “colored in white”, the outline of the display object outer shape is black. Including the form in which the drawing is white and the form in which the outline of the display object outline and the inside of the outline are white, and as the brightness and transparency of the white, the lower image to which white is applied is seen to be overlapped This includes cases where the lightness and transparency are appropriate and cases where the lightness and transparency are not appropriate. Here, the case where the outline of the character is black, the inside is white, and the lower image to be whitened has appropriate lightness and transparency such that it can be seen overlapped is “colored in white”. (The same applies to FIGS. 39 to 41 below.)

  The other character images a, b, and d are represented as “black” colored character images, and the decorative pattern that has stopped changing is represented as “black” colored decorative pattern. When the object is said to be "colored in black", the outline of the display object is white and the inside is black or gray, the outline of the display object is black and the inside is gray, When the outline and the inside include a black form, and the brightness or transparency of the black or gray is such that the lower image to be blackened is seen and overlapped, and if not. And Here, with respect to the other character images a, b, and d and the decoration pattern that has stopped changing, the outline of the outer shape of the character or the decoration pattern is black and the inside is in the form of ash, and the lower image to which the ash is applied is the lower image. A case where the lightness and the transparency are appropriate to the extent that they appear to be overlapped will be described as "colored in black" (the same applies to FIGS. 39 to 41).

  When the character preview effect is displayed in the display mode of FIG. 39B instead of the display mode of FIG. 39A as described above, the player first pays attention to the normal state of the chromatic character images a to d. Instead of the notice effect (FIG. 39 (a)), the notice effect (FIG. 39 (b)) including the achromatic character images a1 to d1 appears. Here, assuming that all of the character images a1 to d1 have the same achromatic color (in this example, "black" and colored), the impact given to the player does not increase further. However, in the case of the present embodiment, among the character images a1 to d1, only the specific character image c1 is an achromatic color (in this example, "black" in this example) whose brightness is extremely different from the other character images a1, b1, and d1. "Is colored with" white "having the largest lightness difference). For this reason, even when it is difficult to understand because it is scattered in the whole of a plurality of character images, it is possible to avoid the situation that "the announcement effect ends without noticing that only one character is different", and easily. It becomes possible to notice that only one is different. Therefore, in addition to the impact of the change from the chromatic display mode to the achromatic display mode, a display mode in which the brightness of only a specific character is extremely different appears, and this informs, for example, that the big hit will be determined. It can be recognized that this is a “rare display mode” corresponding to the premium notice. For this reason, the impact or tension on the player is further increased.

  Further, since the specific character image c1 colored white is separated from the background image by a rectangular image colored black around the outline of the character outer shape, the difference from the other character images a, b, and d is small. The presence of a background (image) is remarkable. That is, since the specific character image c1 is remarkable with respect to the other character images and can be immediately found by the player, further impact is given to the player.

  In the above description, the display modes of the character images a1 to d1 are changed to black, black, white, and black, respectively. Conversely, even when the display mode is changed to a display mode such as white, white, black, and white, Similar effects can be obtained. Further, when the display modes of the character images a to d before the change are respectively different chromatic colors, for example, blue, yellow, green, and red, it is effective to change to one of black and white as described above. However, if the colors are chromatic colors of the same system, for example, blue, blue, blue, and blue, the display modes of all the character images need not be changed to white or black. That is, only the display mode of the character image c or the character images a, b, and d may be changed to black and white ((blue, blue, white, blue), (blue, blue, black, blue,)). , (White, white, blue, white) or (black, black, blue, black)), the same effect as described above can be obtained in this case. The color that changes the image is not limited to the achromatic color of black and white gray, but may be a chromatic color such as blue whose color and hue do not change (hereinafter, referred to as monochrome color).

  In addition, as a method of giving such a second-stage impact, in addition to the method of comparing “chromatic colors” and “achromatic colors” as described above, the same chromatic colors but the relationship of “complementary colors” to each other are used. The method of comparing the two "colors (hues)", the method of comparing the minimum and the maximum of "saturation" among chromatic colors, and the method of "image resolution" of the screen which is a means for fixing an image , A method of comparing a two-dimensional image with a three-dimensional image, a method of comparing an expression method with that of a deformed or dramatic touch, and the like.

(6-2. Preview effect 2 using color elements: Fig. 40)
FIG. 40 shows another example of a preview effect in which a chromatic color and an achromatic color are compared as the character preview effect 2. FIG. 40 (a) is exactly the same as FIG. 39 (a), in which all four character images a to d are display modes in which the same chromatic color is applied, and the background is a decoration in a stopped state and a fluctuating state. The pattern is also a normal chromatic color (so-called color display), and the hold display is also a normal color white display state. However, since as many as four character images a to d appear, it is informed that the degree of expectation of winning is medium among the three levels of large, medium and small.

  FIG. 40B shows a display mode in which four character images a1 to d1 appear in achromatic colors assuming that the expected degree of winning is very high in the character announcement effect. When compared with FIG. 40 (a), FIG. 40 (b) shows that (i) one of the four character images (specific character image) c has high brightness among achromatic colors. (Ii) Character images a1, b1, and d1 of other character images a, b, and d colored with "black" having low lightness among achromatic colors. (Iii) The decorative pattern that has stopped changing is also changed to a decorative pattern colored in “black” with low brightness among achromatic colors. These relationships are the same as the relationships in FIGS. 39A and 39B.

  In the character announcement effect 2 of FIG. 40 (b), the difference from the case of FIG. 39 (b) is that (iv) the changing decorative pattern is changed to a decorative pattern colored in “black”. ) The background display object imitating a rock has changed to a background display object colored in “black”, (vi) the hold display icon has changed to a hold display icon colored in “black”, (vii) And (2) the fact that the background has changed to a "black" colored background.

  Here, the changing decorative pattern is expressed as a decorative pattern colored in “black”, the background display object imitating a rock is expressed as a background display object colored in “black”, and the pending display icon is described as “ Although it was described as a pending display icon colored with "black", when saying "colored with black", the outline of the display object was white and the inside was black or gray, and the outline of the display object was black In this case, the inside image includes the form of gray, the outline of the outline of the display object, and the form of black inside, and the brightness and transparency of the black or ash are such that the lower image to which black or ash is applied overlaps. And the case where it is not provided. Here, the outline image of the decoration pattern, the background display object imitating a rock, and the reserved display icon that are changing are black, the inside is in the form of ash, and the lower image to which ash is applied Are described as "colored in black" (the same applies to FIGS. 39 to 41).

  Also, the background is described as being colored in "black", but if it is said "it was colored in black", the entire screen is covered with ashes as the background, but the background display object, decorative pattern, character, and hold display Have a lightness and transparency that are not hidden (the same applies hereinafter).

  When the character announcement effect is displayed in the display mode of FIG. 40 (b) instead of the display mode of FIG. 40 (a) as described above, the player first sets the character images a1 to d1, the stopped decorative pattern, and the fluctuation. Since the decoration pattern, the background, the background object, and the hold display in the middle have all changed to an achromatic display mode, a great impact is received. In addition, although the character images a1 to d1 are changed to achromatic, only the specific character image c1 is colored with "white" having high brightness, and the other character images a1, b1, and d1 are changed. They are colored with low brightness "black", and the brightness difference between them is extremely different. For this reason, even if a single character image is interleaved in the entirety of the plurality of character images, a remarkable difference that allows the specific character image c1 to be distinguished from the others is given from the viewpoint of the color, and the player can easily recognize the specific character image c1. You can notice that "only one is different." Therefore, in addition to the impact of the image of the entire liquid crystal screen changing from the chromatic display mode to the achromatic display mode, only a specific character image appears in a display mode in which the brightness is extremely different. Since this can be recognized as, for example, a premium notice that informs that the big hit will be determined, the impact given to the player is further increased.

(6-3. Preview effect 3 using color elements: FIG. 41)
FIG. 41 shows another example of a preview effect in which a chromatic color and an achromatic color are compared as a character preview effect 3, specifically, a reach effect that notifies that the winning expectation degree is extremely high. , Which is a so-called group notice. FIG. 41 corresponds to FIG. 39 (b) and FIG. 40 (b), and illustrations corresponding to 71 (a) and FIG. 40 (a) (all of which have chromatic colors: color display) are omitted. ing. That is, FIG. 41 shows a screen on which a second-stage impact is given, which is changed from the chromatic display announcement effect to the achromatic effect display announcement effect.

  FIG. 41 shows a display mode in which the same eight character images a1 to h1 with achromatic colors appear simultaneously in a chromatic background image in the liquid crystal screen. These character images a1 to h1 move from one end of the screen to the other end (from the right to the left in the present embodiment) and pass through the screen, and show the movement in progress. ing.

  The eight character images a1 to h1 are common in that they all have the same achromatic color display mode. However, (i) one of the character images (specific character images) has been changed to a “white-colored” character image “h1” having high lightness among achromatic colors, and (ii) other character images. The character image has been changed to character images' a1 to g1 colored with "black" having low brightness among achromatic colors. Further, (iii) the decorative symbol that has stopped changing and the decorative symbol that is changing are changed from the achromatic color to a decorative image “colored with“ black ”” of low brightness among the achromatic colors. Also, (iv) the background display object imitating a rock and the hold display icon have been changed to the achromatic one colored with “black” having low lightness. The background remains the original chromatic color.

  As described above, instead of the character announcement effect in which all the characters including the group announcement character are displayed in the chromatic (color display) display mode, the character announcement effect including the group announcement is displayed in the achromatic color display mode in FIG. Is displayed, first, the character images a1 to h1, the stopped decorative pattern and the changing decorative pattern, the background object, and the hold display are all changed to the achromatic display mode, so that the player has a great impact. Receive. In addition, although the character images a1 to h1 change to achromatic, only the specific character image h1 is colored with “white” having high brightness, and the other character images a1 to g1 are changed to achromatic color. They are colored with low "black", and the difference in brightness between them is extremely different. For this reason, even if one character image (character image h1) is included in the whole of the plurality of character images constituting the group notice, the specific character image h1 can be distinguished from the others from the viewpoint of color. There is a great difference. For this reason, the player can easily notice that "only one is different". Therefore, in addition to the impact due to the change of the image of the entire liquid crystal screen from the chromatic display mode to the achromatic display mode, only the specific character image h1 during the group notice has an extremely different brightness. Since it appears, it can be recognized as, for example, a premium notice that informs that the big hit will be confirmed, so that the impact given to the player is further increased.

(6-4. Preliminary production using color elements 4: Fig. 42)
FIG. 42 shows a character announcement effect 4 in which a chromatic color and an achromatic color are compared as a first stage of impact, and a chromatic color and an achromatic color are compared as a second stage between a part of the character and another display object. This is another example of the announcement effect described above.

  FIG. 42 (a) is exactly the same as FIG. 39 (a), in which all four character images a to d are display modes in which the same chromatic color is applied, and the background is also a decoration during stopping and changing. The pattern is also a normal chromatic color (so-called color display), and the hold display is also a normal color white display state. However, since as many as four character images a to d appear, it is informed that the degree of expectation of winning is medium among the three levels of large, medium and small.

  FIG. 42 (b) shows that, in the character announcement effect, the winning degree is expected to be very high, and for one of the four character images a1 to d1 (character image c1), the character is achromatic around the outer contour. Are displayed in the form of an aura. In the case of FIG. 42 (b), (i) one character image (specific character image) c of the four character images is an aura colored with “white” having high brightness among achromatic colors. The character image c1 has been changed to a worn-out character image, and (ii) the decorative pattern and the suspended display that have stopped changing have changed to a decorative pattern colored with “black” having low brightness among achromatic colors.

  The first feature of the character announcement effect shown in FIG. 42 is that, since the specific character image c1 appears in an achromatic aura around the character outline, other achromatic display objects (stopped decorations) (Symbol and hold display) and color unification. That is, the change to the screen including the achromatic display object gives the first-stage impact to the player.

  Further, the second feature of the character announcement effect of FIG. 42 is that the specific character image c1 is formed by wearing an aura in which “white” with particularly high brightness is colored among achromatic colors around the character outline. Therefore, the difference from the other chromatic character images a, b, and d is remarkable in terms of the color tone (hue), and “black” having the same achromatic color but low brightness is colored. In addition, the difference in brightness from other displayed objects (stopped decorative design or suspended display) is large, and this is a remarkable point in comparison with this. That is, since the specific character image c1 is remarkable for other chromatic character images and achromatic display objects, and can be found immediately by the player, the second stage impact is given to the player. Given.

  According to the announcement effects 1 to 4 described above, the second-stage impact can be given to the player. In this regard, in the related art, as shown in FIG. 43A, only four character images a to c similar to each other in the liquid crystal screen are displayed in chromatic colors. It was only accepted that a highly anticipated notice was produced. Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), if the hold display changes from the normal color white to “red (hatched portion in the figure)” indicating that the winning expectation is high, the winning expectation is thereby changed. However, at this time, the attention of the player goes to the change of the reserved color, so that the role or presence of the notice effect by the character images a to c becomes thin, and the sense of tension becomes higher. Will be solely borne by the pending change notice. Therefore, the second-stage impact cannot be given to the player.

  The “character notice effect” described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 can be configured so that the effect mode as shown in FIG. 44 can appear. In FIG. 44, for convenience of explanation, a character image mainly intended to draw the player's attention is denoted as “specific character image (for example, c1 in FIG. 39)”, and other character images are used. Is described as “non-specific character image (for example, a1, b1, d1 in FIG. 39)”.

  As shown in the figure, the display modes of various display objects related to the character announcement effect are images such as “monochrome (monochrome)”, “reversal”, “specific color element”, “shape change”, “blur”, “additional effect” and the like. By using the processing, the specific character image and the other image are compared with each other with different color elements, shapes, etc., so that the player can feel uncomfortable with the specific character image and draw attention. In the figure, the character announcement effect displayed using the above-described image processing is referred to as “special expression effect”. In addition to the characters, various display objects such as a "background image", a "background display object image", a "decorative design image", and a "hold icon" other than the character (hereinafter, particularly necessary) These display objects are abbreviated as "background display objects" unless otherwise described), but not all of them appear in the character announcement effect. Therefore, here, at least one of the background display objects will be described as an object of the image processing. However, as long as the object of the present invention can be achieved in comparison with the specific character image, it is needless to say that all the displayed objects may be changed or only a part of them may be a target of the special expression.

  In the illustrated “monochrome (monochrome)”, as described above, the display object is changed to an image “colored in white” or changed to an image “colored in black”. In addition, the image is not limited to an image with a black-and-white gradation (gray), and may be expressed by being changed to an image colored with a single-color gradation. For example, the image may be changed from a color image to a sepia image. As described above, the “monochrome” changes the display object from a chromatic color (color) to a monochrome color.

  The special expression effect patterns 1 to 7 show an example in which a character image or the like is displayed using this “monochrome” process. As illustrated, in the pattern 1, the display mode of the specific character image changes from color to monochrome, while the non-specific character image is maintained in the color display mode. In pattern 2, while the display mode of the non-specific character image changes from color to monochrome, the specific character image is maintained in the color display mode. In the pattern 3, in addition to the display mode of the pattern 2, the display mode changes to a monochrome color for all or a part of the background display object.

  In pattern 4, the display mode of the specific character image changes from color to “monochrome color with high brightness (“ monochrome (high) ”in the drawing)”, whereas the non-specific character image changes from color to “monochrome (high)”. The display mode changes to a low monochrome color (“monochrome (low)” in the figure). The “high-brightness monochrome color” indicates a monochrome color having a brightness higher than a predetermined reference brightness value (for example, a monochrome color including light gray to white), and the “low-brightness monochrome color” indicates a predetermined reference value. (For example, a monochrome color including dark gray to black) having a lightness lower than a lightness value (which may be different from a reference lightness value in the case of high lightness). In pattern 5 (the effect example in FIG. 39), in addition to the display mode of pattern 4, all or a part of the background display changes to the same display mode as the non-specific character image. In the pattern 6, the display mode of the specific character image changes from color to “monochrome color with low brightness”, whereas the display mode of the non-specific character image changes from color to “monochrome color with high brightness”. In pattern 7, in addition to the display mode of pattern 6, all or part of the background display object changes to the same display mode as the non-specific character image.

  In addition, “reversal” shown in the figure displays a display object as a so-called “negative / positive reversal” image. In addition, luminance inversion or complementary color inversion may be used for “inversion”. The special expression effect patterns 8 to 10 show an example in which a character image or the like is displayed using the “reverse” process. In the pattern 8, the display mode of the specific character image is changed from a color to a negative-positive inverted color, while the non-specific character image is maintained in the color display mode. In the pattern 9, the display mode of the non-specific character image is changed from a color to a negative-positive inverted color, whereas the specific character image is maintained in the same color display mode. In the pattern 10, in addition to the display mode of the pattern 9, all or a part of the background display object changes to the same display mode as the non-specific character image.

  The “specific color element” shown in the drawing is displayed by changing at least one of “color tone”, “brightness”, and “saturation” of the display object. The change of the “color tone” is to change to a warm color tone (hereinafter referred to as “warm tone”) or a cool color tone (hereinafter referred to as “cool tone”). The change in “brightness” is changed to a brightness higher than a predetermined reference brightness value or a brightness lower than a predetermined reference brightness value (which may be different from a brightness value when changing to a high brightness). It is to make it. The change in “saturation” is a saturation higher than a predetermined reference saturation value, or a predetermined reference saturation value (which may be different from the saturation value when changing to a high saturation). Is to change to a lower saturation.

  The special expression effect patterns 11 and 12 show examples in which a character image or the like is displayed by changing the specific color element described above. In the pattern 11, the specific character image changes to at least one of a warm tone, a brightness higher than the reference, and a saturation higher than the reference, whereas the non-specific character image changes to the cool tone, the reference The display mode changes to at least one of lightness lower than the reference value and saturation lower than the reference. If the specific character image is changed in a warm tone, the non-specific character image is changed in a cool tone. If the specific character image is changed in brightness higher than the reference (original display), the non-specific character image is changed to the reference. If the specific character image is changed to a higher saturation than the reference, the saturation is changed to a lower saturation than the non-specific character image reference. That is, the specific character image and the non-specific character image are changed in the same category. In the pattern 12, in addition to the display mode of the pattern 11, all or a part of the background display object is changed in the same category as the non-specific character image.

  The “change in form” shown in the figure changes the form of the display object and displays it. The term “change the form” used herein means, for example, changing the display form from a still image to a moving image or a moving image to a still image to increase or decrease the size, from a two-dimensional image to a three-dimensional image, It refers to converting a three-dimensional image to a two-dimensional image, deforming, touching on a dramatic image, or realizing the image. The special expression effect patterns 13 and 14 show an example in which a character image or the like is displayed by the above-mentioned “morphological change” processing. In the pattern 13, while the form of the specific character image is changed, the non-specific character image is maintained as it is. On the contrary, in the pattern 14, the form of the non-specific character image is changed, while the specific character image is maintained in the same form.

  The “blur” shown in the figure displays various display objects other than the specific character image related to the announcement effect, by blurring the outline of the image or by mosaicing the image. The special expression effect patterns 15 and 16 show an example in which a character image or the like is displayed by the “blur” processing. In the pattern 15, the non-specific character image is blurred. In the pattern 16, all or part of the background display object is blurred in addition to the non-specific character image.

The “additional effect” displays an effect image added to the specific character image.
The effect image is a background image for emphasizing a specific character. For example, an effect image representing a character wearing an aura (backlight) around the character, or a prominent image such as a Rising Sun flag image on the background of the character is displayed. And so on. In pattern 17, an effect image is displayed on a specific character. In pattern 18, an effect image is displayed on a specific character, and in order to further emphasize the character, all or part of the background display object is displayed in monochrome. Change.

  In the above, various types of character preview effects are used by using image processing (special expression) of “monochrome”, “reversal”, “specific color element”, “morphological change”, “blurring”, or “additional effects”. Although various patterns of special expression effects for changing the display mode of the display object have been described, a specific display object may be changed by combining a plurality of these image processes. Thereby, the display mode of the specific character image and the other images can be significantly different and compared, and the specific character image is emphasized, so that the player's attention can be easily directed.

  In the above description, an example has been described in which the display mode of various display objects is changed from the color display mode by various special expressions at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the appearance of the specific character. When the character appears, it may be displayed in a display mode in which a special expression has been made from the beginning. In other words, the specific character may be displayed in a state where a special expression such as a monochrome color is made instead of a color, and it is possible to give an impact to the player from the time of appearance. Regarding the “timing when a predetermined time has elapsed” when the display mode of various display objects changes, some action by the specific character (for example, an action in which a balloon image is displayed and a message of the balloon content is issued) Is performed (when the player wants to pay attention to a specific character that causes an action), before or after a specific notice effect (reach effect, pseudo-ream, etc.), or during execution thereof, The timing at which the frame effect button 13 is operated may be used, and the timing at which the frame effect button 13 is displayed can be determined as appropriate.

  In the above description, the character announcement effect that appears during the design variation display game has been described. Also, an image display effect using a special expression can be made to appear.

  FIG. 45 shows a representative example of an effect that can occur with the progress of the game and a timing at which an effect using a special expression appears during the effect. Note that the time-series display (time t) in the figure is provided for convenience of description, and is not necessarily a time corresponding to the progress of the game.

  Referring to FIG. 45, a game history effect can appear during the demonstration screen display (time t0 to time t1). When the player operates the frame effect button 13 during the display of the demo screen, a game history effect is displayed. In this game history effect, as the predetermined game information obtained in the game up to now, for example, a combination of a winning jackpot type (probable variable hit, time saving big hit), a number of consecutive villas, a reach effect type, a variation number, a combination of decorative symbols (A game history from the previous day, a game history from the time of power-on, etc.) are displayed. In these histories, one or more specific types of game information can be displayed in color, and other game information can be displayed in monochrome. Specifically, when a large hit history information image is displayed as a specific jackpot history information image in a color image, such as a long-run hit jackpot history or a probable change big hit, and a single hit big hit history information image is displayed in a monochrome image, and the player is interested. Possible history information can be emphasized and displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Also, during the decorative symbol change display game (time t1 to time t2), various announcement effects can appear as illustrated. If it is desired to emphasize a specific effect (image) display during these notice effects, a display using the above-described various special expressions is possible. For example, when the vehicle reaches the reach state after the swinging state of whether to reach the reach state before the reach effect (time ta to time tb), the decorative pattern forming the reach state is changed from a normal color display to a monochrome display, By using other images (such as background images) as color images, it is possible to give the player an expectation that "there is an unusual reach, so the winning degree may be high". Also, in the reach effect, a resurrection effect that informs that a loss has been once (during the temporary stop state of the decorative pattern after the reach effect (time tf) (after the time tf)) and that it was actually a big hit is provided. When appearing, the combination of the decorative patterns in the temporarily stopped state before the resurrection effect (for example, “767”) is displayed in monochrome, and the other images (such as background images) are displayed in normal color, or vice versa. , The decoration pattern is emphasized, and the player feels a sense of incongruity that "the display is different from usual". Then, a sudden resurrection effect (changing the decoration pattern "767" to "777") appears. By doing so, a stunning effect can be exhibited. In addition, instead of displaying all the decorative symbols in the temporary stop state before the resurrection effect described above in color display or monochrome display, it is possible to emphasize only some decorative symbols (for example, middle symbols).

  Also, during the big hit game from time t2 to time t3, a hit effect (OP effect, round effect, ED effect, etc.) as shown in the figure appears, and an image using a special expression also during these effects. A display effect can appear. For example, the type of jackpot won this time is concealed (it is concealed whether the jackpot is a jackpot or a non-potential jackpot), and if there is a jackpot winning hold in the operation holding ball, information on this during the jackpot during the jackpot is reported. At the time, during a round effect (time th to ti) or an ending effect (time ti to t3) related to a specific round game, the specific character is displayed in color to emphasize the specific character, and other images ( Displaying the background image or the like in monochrome or vice versa (by displaying an effect different from a normal effect) gives the player a sense of incongruity and can notify the player of the information. In addition, the above-mentioned specific character may not appear normally (in this example, when there is no probability change big hit or when there is no big hit winning hold) as a premier positioning, or it may appear in a small display size. In such a case (for example, in the case of the character image h1 as shown in FIG. 41), the character display by the special expression has a strong impact when the player notices the specific character, and has a superior effect. Can be

  In addition, the effect display (image display effect) by the special expression is directed to the attention of a player to a specific display object. The same operation and effect as the object display (second object display) acting as the “distraction effect” can be achieved. Therefore, this example may be applied as the “treasure box effect” described above or the “distraction effect” in the third and fourth modifications.

  The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine having a display unit.

1 Pachinko machine,
2 Front frame,
3 game board,
3a game area,
4 outer frame,
5 ball guide rail,
6 glass doors,
7 Front operation panel,
8 Upper tray unit,
9 Upper saucer,
11 Ball rental button,
12 Card return button,
13 frame production buttons,
13A Normal button (first production button),
14 Ball-off button,
15 launch operation handle,
19 game ball payout device,
20 main control unit,
21 frame external terminal board,
24 production control unit,
28 launch control board,
29 payout control board,
31 power supply board,
32 launchers,
34 upper starting port,
34a upper starting port sensor,
35 Lower starting port,
35a Lower starting port sensor,
36 liquid crystal display device,
37 Ordinary pattern starter,
37a Normal design opening sensor
38a, 38b special symbol display device,
39c LED display for pending composite display,
39a Ordinary symbol display device,
39b round number display device,
41 Ordinary floating winning device,
41c Ordinary electric accessory solenoid,
43 General Winners,
43a General winning opening sensor,
44 windmills,
45 decorative lamps,
45a optical display device,
46 speakers,
46a sound generator,
47 movable wings,
48 Center decoration,
49 Out mouth,
50 Winners,
52a big winning opening sensor,
52 Special variable prize winning device,
52b open door,
52c big winning opening solenoid,
61 Movable object motor,
62 rotating light (third movable object),
66 Revolving light button (second production button: Lucky Pato),
70 exhilaration button (3rd production button: rolling button),
73 movable body 80 clock-type accessory (first movable body accessory),
90 flower-shaped character (second movable character),
91 first movable body,
92 second movable body,
201 main control CPU,
202 main control ROM,
203 main control RAM,
241 effect control CPU,
242 production control ROM,
243 effect control RAM,
371 treasure chest image,
372 push button image,
373 guidance notification image,
374a right arrow image,
374b Left arrow image.

Yu technique machine, for example, a ball-shooting game machine performs a lottery on the hit in the wake of the prize to the start hole, performs a dramaturgic symbol variation display game with a variable display operation of a decorative pattern, the lottery during the game , Various notice effects that reflect the results of the above are generated, and the player's expectation of winning in a win is inspired, and the entertainment interest of the game is enhanced. This type of gaming machine is configured to display various characters and item images that indicate a winning expectation degree of a hit, thereby producing various announcement effects that inspire a player's winning expectation (for example, , Patent Document 1) .

JP 2013-248305 A

However, in a conventional gaming machine, a character or the like is simply made to appear, and there is little variation in effect display, and it is hard to say that an interesting effect is exhibited .

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing a staging effect and improving the interest of a game .

According to the present invention, Ru can be more interesting game to enhance the presentation effect.

Claims (1)

It is configured to be able to generate multiple types of game states,
The game area is configured to be able to be divided into a first downflow path and a second downflow path according to the strength of the game ball launched by the firing means, and the first downflow path and the second downflow path according to the game state. In a ball game machine configured such that the game progress is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player depending on which of the flow paths the game ball is caused to flow down,
Notice effect control means for causing the notice effect to appear on the image display means by notice lottery,
Launch guidance information control means for performing, by an image display means, notification of launch guidance information on whether it is advantageous for the player to aim at the first down flow path or the second down flow path according to the game state. ,
The firing guidance information control means may be configured to control the game state from a first game state in which it is advantageous for the player to aim at the first down flow path, to a second game state in which it is advantageous for the player to aim at the second down flow path. In the case of shifting to, the second launch guidance information that guides the player to aim at the second downstream path is displayed as the launch guidance information in a predetermined display area of the image display means, and the gaming state is the second gaming state. From the first game state, the first launch guidance information that guides the user to aim at the first downstream path as the launch guidance information,
The notice effect control means, when switching from the display of the second launch guidance information to the display of the first launch guidance information by the launch guidance information control means, a period during which the second launch guidance information is displayed and the first An effect for distracting a player from an event in which the launch guidance information is switched from the display of the second launch guidance information to the display of the first launch guidance information during a predetermined period including a period in which the launch guidance information is displayed. Is displayed in a display area larger than the predetermined display area of the image display means,
The display mode of the first launch guidance information is not less visible than at least the display mode of the second launch guidance information.
A ball game machine characterized by the following.

Images